Yamaha CLP-175 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CLP-175

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner's Manual

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate

on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of

the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the

voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To

change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage

appears next to the pointer on the panel.

Clavinova Web site (English only)

http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

DIC 435

CLP-175

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

2003 Yamaha Corporation

WA67380 30?APZC?.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-469

(bottom)

Introduction

CLP-175

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death

from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but

are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument.

The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the

instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or

dust which may have accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as

heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise

damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a

position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the

internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument

contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be

malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in

damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing

liquids which might spill into any openings.

•Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if

there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument,

or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused

by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the

electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or

others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an

outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by

the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument

is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality,

or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the

assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the

proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or

even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations,

or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a

heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of

panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo

equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.

Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it

might accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

(1)B-7

1/2

CLP-175

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic

components, turn off the power for all components. Before

turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume

levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all

components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the

volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired

listening level.

• Gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too

hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument's

ﬁnish.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp

cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or

chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and

do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or

instrument.

•Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the

gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn

off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the

AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,

since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain,

or other hard objects can cause the ﬁnish to crack or peel.

Use caution.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the

instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,

switches or connectors.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause

permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or

ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as

a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in

accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to

prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

• Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the

bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed on

the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to

the mechanism or even injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term

use, tighten them periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

• Current data (see page 48) is lost when you turn off the power

to the instrument. Save the data to a ﬂoppy disk/the storage

memory (see page 48).

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect

operation. Save important data to a ﬂoppy disk.

Backing up the ﬂoppy disk

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we

recommend that you save your important data onto two ﬂoppy

disks.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or

destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

(1)B-7

2/2

CLP-175

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-175. In order to make the most of your

Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly,

and keep it in a safe place for later reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet

This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.”

Also, a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided.

Introduction:

Please read this section ﬁrst. In the “Application Index” section on page 10 and “Features” on

page 14, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations.

Basic Operation:

This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you

play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer

to the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 104, or the

“Index” on page 117.

Detailed Settings:

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions.

Refer to this section as necessary.

Appendix:

This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference

material.

Reference Booklet:

XG Vo ice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

• The model CLP-175 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only,

and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• Copying of the commercially available software is strictry prohibited except for your personal use.

■

Trademarks

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copy-

rights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include,

without limitation, all computer software, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized

use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any vio-

lation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGALCOPIES.

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection,”

is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners,

what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer

system (the manual is not written for any speciﬁc models). The document is available as a PDF ﬁle (in

English) at the following Internet address:

Clavinova Web site (English only): http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library: http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

CLP-175

Introduction.......................................................... 2

PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 3

About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 5

Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 6

Application Index ................................................................................................................................. 10

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk ..................................................................... 12

Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 13

Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 13

Features ................................................................................................................................................ 14

Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 16

About the key cover ...................................................................................................................................................... 16

About the music rest..................................................................................................................................................... 16

About the music braces................................................................................................................................................. 16

About the Lid ................................................................................................................................................................ 17

Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 18

Adjusting the display contrast ...................................................................................................................................... 19

Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 19

Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 19

Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment............................................................................................................... 20

Basic Operation .................................................. 21

Panel Controls and Terminals.............................................................................................................. 22

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 24

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 26

Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 26

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs ....................................................................................................... 28

Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 30

Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 30

Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 31

Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 32

To enhance the acoustic realism of the sound ...[iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control)] ................................ 34

Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 35

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 37

Using the metronome................................................................................................................................................... 39

Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 40

Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 40

Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 40

Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 42

Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 43

Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 44

Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 45

Table of contents

Introduction

Basic Operation

Detailed Settings Appendix

Table of contents

CLP-175

Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 45

Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 45

Changing a voice or tempo after recording ........................................................................................................... 46

Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 47

Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 47

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] ...................................................................... 48

Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 48

Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 49

Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 50

Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] .................................................................................. 51

Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong]......................................................... 52

Renaming a song...[RenameSong] ............................................................................................................................... 53

Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] .................................................................................... 54

Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] .................................................................................................................... 55

Automatically open a song when the disk is inserted [FDSongAutoOpen] .............................................................. 56

Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 56

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data............................................. 57

Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 57

Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 59

Supported song data type ............................................................................................................................................. 59

Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 61

Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 61

Connecting a personal computer................................................................................................................................. 63

Detailed Settings ................................................ 69

Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 70

Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 70

Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 73

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 75

Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 75

Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay]...................................... 76

Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 76

Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 76

Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 76

Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] ................................................................... 77

Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 77

Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ........................................................ 78

Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 78

Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 78

Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 78

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] .............................................................................. 79

Setting the octave [Octave]........................................................................................................................................... 80

Setting the volume level [Volume] .............................................................................................................................. 80

Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan] .................................................................................................. 80

Table of contents

CLP-175

Make fine adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune].......................................................................... 80

Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType]....................................................................................................................... 81

Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]........................................................................................................................ 81

Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 81

Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend] ...................................................................................................................... 81

Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 82

Selecting the DSP type [DSP Type (DSP)] .................................................................................................................. 82

Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect [VibeRotorSpeed(RotorSpeed)] ................................................ 82

Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off [VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff)] .................................................... 83

Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker [RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed)]............................................................ 83

Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect [DSPDepth].................................................................................................... 83

Adjusting the brightness of the sound [Brightness].................................................................................................... 83

Adjusting the resonance effect [HarmonicContent (Harmonic)] ............................................................................. 83

Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer [EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq)] ....................................................84

Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer [EQ LowGain]............................................. 84

Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer [EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq)] ................................................ 84

Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer [EQ HighGain] .......................................... 84

Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense].................................................................................................................. 85

Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 85

Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 85

Setting the left pedal function [LPedal]....................................................................................................................... 86

Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 86

Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING].......................................................................................... 87

Selecting the iAFC type [iAFC Type]........................................................................................................................... 87

Adjusting the iAFC depth [iAFC Depth]..................................................................................................................... 87

Calibration (automatic adjustment) [Calibration]..................................................................................................... 88

Restoring the default iAFC settings [iAFC Default].................................................................................................... 88

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 89

About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 89

Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 90

Setting the MIDI receive channel [MidiInChannel]................................................................................................... 90

Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 91

Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 91

Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 91

Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 91

Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] ...................................................................................... 92

Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 92

Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 93

Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 93

Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 93

Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]............................................................................... 93

Selecting a scale [Scale]................................................................................................................................................. 94

Specifying the Split Point [SplitPoint]......................................................................................................................... 94

Changing the key [Transpose] ..................................................................................................................................... 94

Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal [SoftPedalDepth] ............................................................................................ 95

Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 95

Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 95

Specify the volume of the key-off sound [KeyOffSamplingDepth] ........................................................................... 95

Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode]........................................................................ 95

Assign the SONG [START/STOP] function to the pedal [PedalStart/Stop]............................................................. 96

Introduction

Basic Operation

Detailed Settings Appendix

Table of contents

CLP-175

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 96

Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 96

Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 96

Switch the speaker on/off [Speaker] ............................................................................................................................ 97

Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 97

Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 97

Other method for restoring the normal settings ......................................................................................................... 97

Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 98

Questions about Operations and Functions ...................................................................................... 104

Appendix .......................................................... 107

Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 108

Data Compatibility ............................................................................................................................. 109

Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................. 111

Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................. 113

Keyboard Stand Assembly ................................................................................................................. 114

Index................................................................................................................................................... 117

CLP-175

Introduction

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation.

Listening

Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24

“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26

Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24

Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Piano” ..............“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26

Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 40

“Playing back a song” on page 57

Listening to songs in a ﬂoppy disk............................................................. “Playing back a song” on page 57

Playing

Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 31

Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ....................... “Changing the key [Transpose]” on page 94

Changing tonal color

Viewing the list of voices................................................................................ “Preset Voice List” on page 111

Simulating a concert hall...........................................................................................“[REVERB]” on page 33

Combining two voices..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 35

Playing different sounds with left and right hands

...........................“Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 37

Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 32

Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 33

Making the sound three-dimensional

..............................................................................“[iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control)]” on page 34

Practicing

Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 28

Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 39

Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 40

“Turning track playback on and off” on page 59

Recording

Recording your performance ...................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 40

Saving recorded songs to ﬂoppy disks or memory

...........................................................“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 48

Application Index

CLP-175

Introduction

Settings

Making detailed settings for recording and playback

............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 75

Making detailed settings for the metronome

......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 78

Making detailed settings for the voices

................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 79

Making detailed settings for MIDI .................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 89

Making detailed settings for the Clavinova.........................................................“Other settings” on page 93

Connecting the Clavinova to other devices

What is MIDI?......................................................................................................... “About MIDI” on page 89

Recording your performance

................................. “AUX OUT [R][L] Pin jacks (LEVEL FIXED), [R][L/L+R] Phone jacks” on page 62

Raising the volume .. “AUX OUT [R][L] Pin jacks (LEVEL FIXED), [R][L/L+R] Phone jacks” on page 62

Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova.......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 62

Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63

Assembling

Assemble/disassemble the Clavinova.............................................“Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 114

Quick solution

What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 10

“Features” on page 14

Returning to the main screen................................................................................. “EXIT button” on page 22

Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting

................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 97

Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 98

If you have questions about operations and functions

............................................................................ “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 104

Troubleshooting............................................................................................. “Troubleshooting” on page 108

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation.

CLP-175

Introduction

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)

and Floppy Disk

Precautions

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with

care. Follow the important precautions below.

Compatible Disk Type

3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks

To insert a ﬂoppy disk into the disk drive:

Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and

the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot.

Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the

way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.

To eject a ﬂoppy disk:

Before ejecting the disk, be sure to conﬁrm that the ﬂoppy

disk drive is stopped. If the disk drive is operating (during

the [SaveToDisk] (P51), [DeleteSong] (P52), [RenameSong]

(P53), [CopyDisk] (P54), or [FormatDisk] (P55) opera-

tion), the Clavinova displays [Executing].

Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

when the disk drive is operating. Doing so can damage the

disk and possibly the disk drive.

Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will

automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, care-

fully remove it by hand.

If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not

pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly.

The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed posi-

tion with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few

millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the

partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can

damage the disk drive mechanism or the ﬂoppy disk. To

remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button

once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then

repeat the eject procedure.

Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive before

turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the drive for

extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can

cause data read and write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

•Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually

cause read and write errors.

•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-avail-

able dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about

once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the avail-

ability of proper head-cleaning disks.

•Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk drive.

Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or

ﬂoppy disks.

About the Floppy Disks

•To handle ﬂoppy disks with care:

•Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy disks

in their protective cases when they are not in use.

•Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high

or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liq-

uids.

•Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

•Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as those

produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since

magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase data on

the disk, rendering it unreadable.

•Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.

•Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to

a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in

the proper location.

Drive lamp

When the power is turned on, the drive

lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to

indicate the drive can be used.

Eject button

CLP-175 13

Introduction

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk

•To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):

•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the

disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open).

• Data backup

•For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that

you keep two copies of important data on separate ﬂoppy

disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or dam-

aged. To make a backup disk use the Copy Disk function

on page 54.

Maintenance

Clean the instrument using a dry or slightly damp soft cloth (wring well).

CAUTION

Do not use benzene, thinner, detergent, or chemically-treated cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber

products on the instrument.

Otherwise, the panel or keys may become discolored or degraded.

CAUTION

Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-4.

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move

the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit.

Tr ansport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the

instrument to excessive vibration or shock.

The CLP-175 features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located on the

bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open the lid with the longer

stay (page 17).

In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the following:

• Perform the automatic adjustment after each time you re-locate the Clavinova. (page 88)

• Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova.

Included Accessories

“50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection

Owner’s Manual

Reference Booklet

Recording disk

Save your recorded performance to this disk. (page 51)

Bench

(included or optional depending on locale)

write-protect tab open

(protect position)

TIP

14 CLP-175

Introduction

POWER

TEMPO

VARIATION

BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT

CHORUS ON

OFFREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

AFC

SETTING

AFC

SETTINGSTART/STOP

NO YES

DOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

METRONOME

DEMO

SONG BALANCE

MASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

SONG

SETTING

FILE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

MAXMIN

EXIT

CONTRAST

EFFECT

TO HOST

USB

MIDIAUX PEDAL

THRU

HOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

OUTIN

AUX INAUX OUT

L+RRL

L+RRRL

LEVEL FIXED

PEDAL

PHONES

A set of standard

stereo head-

phones can be

plugged in here

for private prac-

tice. (page 19)

Connect the pedal

cord here to use the

Clavinova’s pedals.

(page 115)

Connect a MIDI device

here to use various MIDI

functions. (page 61, 66)

(About MIDI—page 89)

Connect an optional pedal

here and assign one of

the various functions to

the pedal. (page 61)

This jack can be con-

nected to your comput-

er, allowing you to

transfer MIDI data be-

tween the Clavinova

and the computer.

(page 63, 67, 68)

This jack and selector

switch allow direct

connection to a per-

sonal computer for se-

quencing and other

music applications.

(page 63–65)

You can output the sound of the

Clavinova from an external au-

dio system, or connect it to a

cassette tape recorder etc. and

record your playing. (page 62)

These jacks allow you to connect

an external tone generator to

reproduce the sound via the

Clavinova’s internal sound system

and speakers. (page 62)

Features

The Yamaha CLP-175 Clavinova features rich sounds produced by Yamaha’s proprietary “AWM dynamic stereo

sampling” tone generator system, and a special “Natural Keyboard” that uses wooden keys with an action mecha-

nism for improved continuous key response. The CLP-175 GrandPiano1 voice features 3 velocity-switched samples

(Dynamic Sampling), “String Resonance” (page 95) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sam-

pling” (page 95)that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the

damper pedal is pressed, and “Key-off Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The

CLP-175 comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano.

CLP-175 15

Introduction

TEMPO

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUS ON

OFFREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

AFC

SETTING

AFC

SETTINGSTART/STOP

NO YES

DOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

METRONOME

DEMO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

SONG

SETTING

FILE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

MAXMIN

EXIT

CONTRAST

EFFECT

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

You can change the song tempo (speed).

(page 27, 39, 41, 58)

BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT]

Adjust the brightness of the tone

using these buttons. (page 32)

[VOICE SETTING] / [VARIATION]

You can make detailed settings for

tone and effects. (page 79)

[EXIT]

The screen returns to its

main display when you

press this button. (page 23)

[SONG SETTING]

Make detailed settings for

song recording and playback.

(page 75)

The display

allows accu-

rate control

and opera-

tion.

(page 23)

[DEMO]

Demonstration

playback is

available for each

voice. (page 24)

[MASTER VOLUME]

Adjust the volume

level using this dial.

(page 19)

[CONTRAST]

Adjust the bright-

ness of the display

using this control.

(page 19)

[REVERB] / [CHORUS]

Add reverb (reverberation) and spread

(chorus) to the sound. (page 33)

[MIDI SETTING]

Make detailed MIDI settings,

such as MIDI receive/transmit

channels. (page 89)

[FILE]

Save recorded songs and

manage song files. (page 48)

[METRONOME]

Use the metronome

functions. (page 39)

The Clavinova includes

50 preset songs.

This section enables you to

listen to these songs, prac-

tice using a convenient

practice function, play back

Clavinova music data (sold

in music stores), and re-

cord and play back your

performance.

(page 26, 40, 57)

[SPLIT]

You can play different

voices on the left- and

right-hand sections of the

keyboard. (page 37)

Voice group buttons

You can choose from sixteen groups of

voices, including grand piano. (page 30)

You can also combine two voices and use

them together. (page 35)

[OTHER SETTING]

This lets you make detailed settings, such as adjusting the key-

board touch or making fine adjustments to the pitch. (page 93)

[SONG BALANCE]

This lets you adjust the volume

balance between the song playback

and the sound you are playing on

the keyboard. (page 47)

You can use the iAFC only when you open the lid with the

longer stay. (page 17)

[iAFC ON/OFF]

This enhances the acoustic realism of the sound produced

from the Clavinova, similar to the sound of an acoustic instru-

ment. (page 34)

[iAFC SETTING]

You can select the iAFC type and make other detailed

settings for iAFC. (page 87)

•

Perform the automatic adjustment after you

turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first

time, and after each time you re-locate the

Clavinova. (page 88)

•

Do not block the speaker located on the bottom

face of the Clavinova.

In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please

observe the following:

TIP

Features

16 CLP-175

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

About the key cover

To open the key cover:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

To close the key cover:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the

cover over the keys.

About the music rest

To raise the music rest:

1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the

rear of the music rest.

3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.

To lower the music rest:

1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.

2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest).

3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way

down.

CAUTION

Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands

from the music rest until it is all the way down.

About the music braces

These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place.

CAUTION

Be careful to avoid catching

your fingers when opening or

closing the cover.

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be

careful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and the unit.

Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key

cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could

cause electric shock, short circuit, ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.

To open

To close

CLP-175 17

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

About the Lid

One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid. Use one of them to

open the lid to the desired angle.

For the longer stay, use the

inner recess, and for the

shorter stay, use the outer

recess to support the lid.

To open the lid:

1. Raise and hold the right side of the lid (viewed from the

keyboard end of the instrument).

2. Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end

of the stay ﬁts into the recess in the lid.

To turn on the iAFC (page 34), open the lid with the longer

stay using the inner recess.

When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the

iAFC will not be turned on.

To close the lid:

1. Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid.

2. Hold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay.

3. Carefully lower the lid.

CAUTION

•Make sure that the end of the stay ﬁts securely in the lid recess. If the stay is not properly seated in the recess, the

lid may fall, causing damage or injury.

•Be careful that you or others do not bump the stay while the lid is raised. The stay may be bumped out of the lid

recess causing the lid to fall.

•Be careful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children's) when raising or lowering the lid.

NOTE

Longer stay

Shorter stay

18 CLP-175

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

Turning the power on

1. Connect the power cable.

First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of

the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.

In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in

your area.

WARNING!

Make sure your CLP-175 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the

name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard

unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong

AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-175. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, con-

tact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a ﬁre and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-175 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In

some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify

the plug provided with the CLP-175. If the plug will not ﬁt the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualiﬁed electrician.

2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova.

Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on.

•The screen located in the center of the front panel lights up. The drive

lamp below the lower right end of the keyboard also lights.

If you close the key cover

without turning the power

off, the drive lamp remains

lit, indicating that the power

is still on.

Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova.

•The screen and the drive lamp turn off.

(The shape of plug differs

depending on locale.)

TIP

NO YES

[POWER]

The drive lamp lights.

When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name

appears on the screen.

CLP-175 19

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

Adjusting the display contrast

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.

Setting the volume

To adjust the volume, use the [MASTER VOLUME] located at the left of the panel. Play the keyboard to actu-

ally produce sound while you adjust the volume.

Using headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks.

When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES]

jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off.

Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo

headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of

headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.)

CAUTION

Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of time.

Doing so may cause hearing loss.

Using the Headphone Hanger

A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-175 package so that

you can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the head-

phone hanger using included two screws (4 × 10mm) as shown in

the ﬁgure.

CAUTION

Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Oth-

erwise, the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged.

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

NO YES

Use this knob.

CONTRAST:

difference between

brightness and dark-

ness

TERMINOLOGY

MASTER VOLUME

MAXMIN

CAUTION

Do not use the Clavi-

nova at a high volume

level for a long period of

time, or your hearing

may be damaged.

The level

increases.

The level

decreases.

MASTER VOLUME:

The volume level of the entire keyboard sound

You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level, the

AUX IN input level and the AUX OUT [L/L+R][R]

output level using the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

PHONES

Optional headphones

HPE-160 Yamaha headphones.

TIP

20 CLP-175

Introduction

Before Using the Clavinova

Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment

The CLP-175 features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker

located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when

you open the lid with the longer stay. (page 17)

In order to optimize the iAFC effect, perform the automatic adjustment. (page 88)

CLP-175 21

Basic Operation

22 CLP-175

Basic Operation

Panel Controls and Terminals

POWER

TEMPO

VARIATION

BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT

CHORUS ON

OFFREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

AFC

SETTING

AFC

SETTINGSTART/STOP

NO YES

DOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

METRONOME

DEMO

SONG BALANCE

MASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

SONG

SETTING

FILE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

MAXMIN

EXIT

CONTRAST

EFFECT

TEMPO

SETTINGSTART/STOP

DOWN

METRONOME

DEMO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

SONG

SETTING

FILE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

MAXMIN

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUS ON

OFFREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PA D

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

iAFC

SETTING

iAFC

NO YES

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

EXIT

CONTRAST

EFFECT

PHONES

J K

N P

L M O Q

C D

Center “C”

C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4

C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

B-1A-1

Top panel

[POWER]..............................................P18

2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P19

3 SONG BALANCE..................................P47

4 [DEMO] ...............................................P24

5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ].........P26, 40, 57

6 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] /

[EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 40–45, 59

7 [FILE] ...................................................P48

8 [TOP] / SONG [START/STOP]

................................................P26, 41, 58

9 [REC]....................................................P41

0 [SONG SETTING] ................................P75

A METRONOME [START/STOP] /

[SETTING]......................................P39, 78

B TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .............P27, 39, 58

C LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] /

C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P23

D LCD screen ..........................................P23

E [CONTRAST] knob...............................P19

F [EXIT]...................................................P23

G Voice group buttons ...........................P30

H [VOICE SETTING] ................................P79

I [SPLIT] .................................................P37

J [REVERB]..............................................P33

K [CHORUS]............................................P33

L VARIATION [▼] [▲] .............................P30

M BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT].......P32

N iAFC [ON/OFF] ....................................P34

O [iAFC SETTING] ...................................P87

P [MIDI SETTING]...................................P89

Q [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P93

R [PHONES] ............................................P19

S Soft pedal............................................P31

T Sostenuto pedal ..................................P31

U Damper pedal .....................................P31

CLP-175 23

Basic Operation

Panel Controls and Terminals

Connectors

[AUX PEDAL] ..................................... P61

W MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P61

X HOST SELECT..................................... P61

Y [TO HOST] ......................................... P61

Z [USB].................................................. P61

[ AUX IN ............................................... P62

\ AUX OUT............................................ P62

] [PEDAL] ............................................P115

_ Floppy disk drive................................ P12

TO HOST

USB

MIDIAUX PEDAL

THRU

HOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

OUTIN

AUX INAUX OUT

L+RRL

L+RRRL

LEVEL FIXED

X Z

[

PEDAL

]

NO YES

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI

standard which guarantees that any data conform-

ing to the standard will play accurately on any GM-

compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any

manufacturer.

XG Format

XG is a new Yamaha MIDI speciﬁcation which sig-

niﬁcantly expands and improves on the “GM System

Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capac-

ity, expressive control, and effect capability while

retaining full compatibility with GM.

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

This is a sound map format supported by Clavino-

vas and many other Yamaha MIDI instruments.

To ne generators and music data compatible with

this format carry the DOC logo.

iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control)

This is functionality that uses a multi-channel

speaker system to generate three-dimensional

acoustical effects from musical instruments.

C LCD buttons

D LCD

Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the con-

tents displayed on the LCD.

Check the screen located in the center of the top

panel after every operation. A voice name appears

on the screen when you turn on the power to the

unit.

F [EXIT] button

When you press this button, the unit returns to the

default screen (the screen that indicates a voice

name(s) and is displayed when the power is turned

on).

a Panel logos

Basic Operation

24 CLP-175

Listening to the Demonstration

Tunes

For each voice group, the Clavinova contains one demo song that shows off the character of the voices.

This section explains how to listen to the demo songs for the voice groups listed below.

Demonstration tunes

The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts the original

compositions.

Procedure

Mode:

A mode is a status under

which you can execute a

certain function. In demo

mode, you can play back

demonstration tunes.

1. Engage the demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode.

The indicators of the voice group buttons will blink in succession.

Voice group Tunes Composer

GRAND PIANO1 Consolation No.3 F.Liszt

HARPSICHORD Gavotte J.S.Bach

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

1 4

2 3

Voice

group buttons

TERMINOLOGY

CLP-175 25

Basic Operation

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

To adjust the volume level of

the demo songs, use the

[MASTER VOLUME] dial.

To adjust the volume bal-

ance between the song

playback and the sound you

are playing on the keyboard,

use the [SONG BALANCE]

slider (page 47) .

2. Select a tune and start playback.

Press the voice group button for the demo song that you

want to hear.

The indicator of the voice group button you pressed will light, and the

demo song will begin playing. Subsequently, the demo songs will play

back consecutively from the upper left voice group button until you

stop the playback.

3. Stop the playback.

Press the button of the voice group being played or the

SONG [START/STOP] button.

4. Exit from demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] or [EXIT] button to exit from demo

mode.

NOTE

TIP

By holding down the [DEMO] button and pressing the A[–]/[+]

buttons to get the [PianoDemo] display, you can hear the piano

demo / iAFC demo. The piano demo lets you compare the result of

enabling/disabling each sampling technology.

The iAFC demo lets you compare three iAFC types. The demo

songs are assigned to the sound buttons as follows.

GRAND PIANO1 ................. Stereo Piano (stereo sampling)

GRAND PIANO2 ................. Mono Piano (mono sampling)

E.PIANO1............................ mezzo piano (dynamic sampling,

mezzopiano)

E.PIANO2............................ mezzo forte (dynamic sampling, mez-

zoforte)

HARPSICHORD.................. forte (dynamic sampling, forte)

E.CLAVICHORD.................. with Sustain (with sustain sampling)

VIBRAPHONE..................... no Sustain (without sustain sampling)

GUITAR ............................... with KeyOff (with key-off sampling)

CHURCH ORGAN............... no KeyOff (without key-off sampling)

JAZZ ORGAN...................... with StringRes (with string reso-

nance)

STRINGS............................. no StringRes (without string reso-

nance)

GHOIR................................. with iAFC SEE(iAFC spatial ensem-

ble effect)

SYNTH.PAD ........................ with iAFC NSB (iAFC natural sound-

board)

WOOD BASS ...................... with iAFC DDE (iAFC dynamic

damper effect)

Basic Operation

26 CLP-175

Listening to 50 Piano Preset

Songs

The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 26) or

use them for practice (page 28). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” that contains the

scores for 50 piano preset songs.

Playing the 50 piano preset songs

Procedure

Song:

On the Clavinova, perfor-

mance data is called a

“Song.” This includes dem-

onstration tunes and piano

preset tunes.

1. Select a song.

Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to

select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050.

You can play the keyboard

along with the preset song

playback. You can change the

voice playing on the keyboard.

2. Play a preset song.

Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

23 4

METRONOME [START/STOP]

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

TERMINOLOGY

Song select screen

NO YES

The song number appears on the display.

TIP

•You can also use the C

[–]/[+] buttons to select a

song after pressing the

[SONG SELECT] button.

• [P-000: NewSong] is a

blank song provided for

you to record your perfor-

mance. (See page 40.)

• Use the SongRepeat

parameter in the “SONG

SETTING” menu to

select repeat playback of

all songs or repeat play-

back of a single song.

(See page 77.)

TIP

NO YES

the number of measures

CLP-175 27

Basic Operation

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Adjusting the tempo

You can also use the D[–]/[+]

buttons to change the tempo.

Resetting the tempo

Whenever you select a new

preset song, the tempo is

automatically reset to the

song’s original value.

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when

you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously.

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

3. Stop the song playback.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [TOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops when you press the

button.

Fast forward and rewind

You can perform the following operations in the song select screen:

If you have selected a disc

song and there is a folder

before the song, the folder

will appear on the display

when you press the SONG

SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons

or C [–]/[+] buttons during

song playback.

•Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast for-

ward) through the song while the song is played or stopped.

•Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to

restart playback from the top of the song.

•Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to

start playback from the next song.

•Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is

stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song.

Default screen:

The default screen is a voice

select screen (page 30) that

appears when you turn on

the power to the Clavinova.

4. Return to the default screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

TIP

NOTE

NO YES

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

Basic Operation

28 CLP-175

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs

The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and

right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off)

on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2].

procedure

You can turn parts on or off,

even during playback.

1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.

After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or

[TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part.

When you ﬁrst select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indica-

tors light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you

press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding but-

ton indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted.

Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off.

2. Start playback and playing.

Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

Play the part you just turned off.

Synchro:

Synchronous;occurring at the

same time

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the

keyboard (Synchro Start)

You can cause playback to begin when you play the keyboard (Syn-

chro Start).

Hold down the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP]

button. The SONG [START/STOP] indicator will blink, and the

Clavinova will wait for Syncro Start.

Now when you play the keyboard, playback will begin at the same

moment.

If you press the [TOP] button while waiting, Synchro Start will be

cancelled.

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

CLP-175 29

Basic Operation

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

3. Stop playback.

Resetting the part play-

back

Both parts are automatically

turned ON whenever you

select a new song.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle

of a song, press the [TOP] button. You can also pause playback by

pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops when you

press the button.

TIP

Yo u can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to

the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 76.

Basic Operation

30 CLP-175

Selecting and Playing Voices

Selecting Voices

Procedure

Voice

On the Clavinova, a voice

means “tone” or “tonal color.”

You can also switch between

voices in the same group by

pressing a voice group but-

ton repeatedly.

To learn characteristics of

the voices, listen to demo

songs for each voice group

(page 24). Refer to “Preset

Voice List” on page 111 for

more information on charac-

teristics of each preset voice.

You can control the loudness of

a voice by how hard you play

the keyboard, although differ-

ent playing styles (touch sensi-

tivities) have little or no effect

with the sound of certain musi-

cal instruments. Refer to “Pre-

set Voice List” on page 111.

XG is a major enhancement

of the GM System level 1

format, and was developed

by Yamaha specially to pro-

vide more voices and varia-

tions, as well as greater

expressive control over

voices and effects, and to

ensure compatibility of data

well into the future.

If you select XG and then

simultaneously press the

VARIATION [

▼][▲] buttons,

the XG voice select screen

will appear.

1. Select a voice group.

Press a voice group button.

2. Select a voice.

Use the VARIATION [

▼]/[▲] buttons or the A [–]/[+] but-

tons to select a voice.

If you select XG

If you select XG, you can select the XG voice group ﬁrst, then select the desired voice.

2-1. Simultaneously press the [–][+] screen buttons located

beside the XG voice name display, to access a screen

where you can select XG voices.

2-2. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the voice group.

2-3. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select the desired voice.

•For details on XG voices, refer to “XG voice list” (the separate reference booklet).

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

Voice

group buttons

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Voice group Voice name Voice group Voice name

GRANDPIANO1

GrandPiano1

CHURCHORGAN

PipeOrganPrincipal

MellowPiano PipeOrganTutti

RockPiano PipeOrganFlute1

HonkyTonkPiano PipeOrganFlute2

GRANDPIANO2

GrandPiano2

JAZZORGAN

JazzOrgan

BrightPiano RotaryOrgan

E.PIANO1

E.Piano1 MellowOrgan

SynthPiano

STRINGS

Strings

E.PIANO2

E.Piano2 SynthStrings

Vintage E.Piano SlowStrings

HARPSICHORD

Harpsichord8'

CHOIR

Choir

Harpsichord8'+4' SlowChoir

E.CLAVICHORD

E.Clavichord Scat

Wah Clavi.

SYNTH.PAD

SynthPad1

VIBRAPHONE

Vibraphone SynthPad2

Marimba

WOOD BASS

WoodBass

Celesta Bass&Cymbal

GUITAR

NylonGuitar

E.BASS

ElectricBass

SteelGuitar FretlessBass

XG XGVoice

CLP-175 31

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Using the pedals

The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto

pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive

effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

If the damper pedal doesn’t

work, or notes are sustained

even when the pedal is not

pressed, make sure that the

pedal cord is properly

plugged into the PEDAL jack

on the unit (see step 3 on

page 115). Also, make sure

that the RPedal parameter in

the “VOICE SETTING”

menu is set to ON (see

page 85).

Damper (right) pedal

When you press the damper pedal, the notes

you play have a longer sustain.

When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the

damper pedal activates the instrument’s special

“Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the

unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s

soundboard and strings.

You can adjust the depth of

the resonance produced by

the “Sustain Samples” using

the Sustain Sampling Depth

parameter in the “OTHER

SETTING” menu. (See

page 95.)

Sostenuto (center) pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard

and press the sostenuto pedal while holding

the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as

the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will

not sustain.

You can assign a function to

each pedal via the “R

Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L

Pedal” parameters in the

“VOICE SETTING” menu.

(See pages 85, 86.)

The center and left pedals

can also be assigned to

song start/stop operation

(START/STOP function) via

the “PedalStart/Stop”

parameter in the “OTHER

SETTING” menu (on

page 96).

Soft pedal (left)

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes

played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are

already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you

play the target notes.)

With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and

off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 95.)

TIP















When you press the damper

pedal here, the notes you

play before you release the

pedal have a longer sustain.

TIP















When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the

note(s), the notes will sustain

as long as you hold the pedal.

TIP

Basic Operation

32 CLP-175

Selecting and Playing Voices

Adding variation to the sound

[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS]

The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance,

Reverb, and Chorus.

[BRILLIANCE]

You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference.

Procedure

You can press the BRIL-

LIANCE [MELLOW]/

[BRIGHT] buttons, and then

use the D [–]/[+] buttons to

select the desired tonality.

Normal setting = Normal

Normal setting:

The “Normal setting” refers

to the default setting (factory

setting) obtained when you

ﬁrst turn on the power to the

Clavinova.

If you select [Bright1],

[Bright2] or [Bright3] as the

type of brilliance, the volume

level will increase slightly.

Under this condition, if you

raise the [MASTER VOL-

UME] dial setting, the sound

may become distorted. In

this case, lower the volume

accordingly.

Press one of the BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/ [BRIGHT] buttons

to select the desired tonality.

Normal...........Standard tone

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

[REVERB]

BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] / [BRIGHT]

[CHORUS]

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

NOTE

Mellow3

Soft and mellow tone.

The sound becomes more mellow and rounder as the

number increases.

Mellow2

Mellow1

Bright1

Bright tone.

The sound becomes brighter as the number increases.

Bright2

Bright3

NO YES

CLP-175 33

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

[REVERB]

This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall.

Procedure

You can select a reverb type

via the Reverb Type parame-

ter in the “VOICE SET-

TING” menu, and adjust the

reverb depth for the selected

voice via the Reverb Send

parameter. (See page 81.)

Normal setting = ON

Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb

on and off.

Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect

will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is

selected.

[CHORUS]

This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound.

Procedure

You can select a chorus type

via the Chorus Type param-

eter in the “VOICE SET-

TING” menu, and adjust the

chorus depth for the

selected voice via the

Reverb Send parameter. You

can also turn chorus on or

off via the Chorus On Off

parameter. (See page 81.)

Normal Setting

The normal chorus on/off

setting is different for each

voice.

Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the cho-

rus on and off.

You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS]

ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off

parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 82). The [CHO-

RUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if

you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is

cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each

voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is auto-

matically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting.

TIP

Basic Operation

34 CLP-175

Selecting and Playing Voices

To enhance the acoustic realism of the sound ...[iAFC

(Instrumental Active Field Control)]

When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper and more resonant, similar to an acoustic musical

instruments.

•To turn on the iAFC, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess.

When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the iAFC will not be turned on.

•Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the ﬁrst time,

and after each time you move the Clavinova. (page 88)

Procedure

How iAFC works

Sounds picked up by mics

and sounds produced inter-

nally by the Clavinova are

processed and output from

the speaker on the bottom

face to enhance acoustic

realism of the sound.

iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR

(Electronic Microphone

Rotator) technology to

ensure stability against

acoustic feedback.

iAFC cannot be used in

the following cases:

When using iAFC, do not

block the speaker located on

the bottom face of the Clavi-

nova. The optimal iAFC

effect cannot be obtained if

this speaker is blocked.

[iAFC SETTING] lets you

select the type of iAFC and

adjust the depth of the

effect. (page 87)

Normal setting = ON

iAFC will toggle on or off each time you press iAFC [ON/

OFF] switch.

iAFC [ON/OFF]

TIP

• When the lid is closed or

open with the shorter stay.

• When the Speaker setting

is Normal, and head-

phones are connected.

• When the Speaker setting

is Off.

TIP

CLP-175 35

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Combining two voices (Dual mode)

You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate

a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Exam-

ples (Dual and Split)” on page 113 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Dual mode using voices in different voice groups

Procedure

1. Enter Dual mode.

If you want to select Dual

mode for the left-hand area

when the entire keyboard is

divided into left and right

areas (page 37), hold down

[SPLIT] and simultaneously

press two voice group but-

tons.

You can also use the VARIA-

TION [▼]/[▲] buttons to

select the voice 1.

Refer to page 30 for details

on how to select XG voices.

Press two voice group buttons simultaneously.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a

voice.

The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 111

are called voice 1, and those listed in the bottom row are called

voice 2.

3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any voice group button.

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

1 3

1 43

Voice

The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps

The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps

group buttons

in Dual mode using voices from different groups.

in Dual mode using voices from the same group.

Voice

group buttons

TIP

Voice 1 Voice 2

NO YES

Basic Operation

36 CLP-175

Selecting and Playing Voices

Dual mode using voices in the same voice group

Procedure

If you want to select Dual

mode for the left-hand area

when the entire keyboard is

devided into left and right

areas (page 37), press the D

[–]/[+] buttons.

1. Select a voice group.

In normal play mode, press the desired voice group but-

ton.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.

3. Select another voice.

Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the

same voice group.

To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use

different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] but-

tons repeatedly.

4. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any voice group button.

TIP

NO YES

CLP-175 37

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two differ-

ent voices (Split mode)

Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another

with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the [WOOD BASS] or [E. BASS] voice with

the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on

page 113 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Procedure

1. Enter Split mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button.

You can also use the A [–]/

[+] buttons to select a voice

for the right-hand area.

Refer to page 30 for details

on how to select XG voice.

2. Select a voice for the right hand.

Use the voice group buttons and the VARIATION [

▼]/[▲]

buttons to select the voice for the right-hand area.

3. Select a voice for the left hand.

Hold down the [SPLIT] button, and press a voice group

button to select the voice group for the left-hand area.

Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.

2 3 1 3 4 5

4 23

Voice

group buttons

TIP

Basic Operation

38 CLP-175

Selecting and Playing Voices

A speciﬁed “split point” key

is included in the left-hand

range.

The split point can also be

set by the [OTHER SET-

TING] parameter [Split-

Point]. (page 94)

4. Specify the split point (the border between the right-

and left-hand range).

The normal setting of the split point is “F



2.”

To change the split point setting:

Hold down the [SPLIT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] but-

tons to specify the split point.

(Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT] button and

play the key you wish to assign as the split point.

Release the [SPLIT] button to return to the main screen.

5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.

Press the [SPLIT] button.

TIP

You can use Dual (see page 35) in each area (right-hand and left-hand) of Split

mode.

Center “C”

NO YES

CLP-175 39

Basic Operation

Selecting and Playing Voices

Using the metronome

The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for

practice.

Procedure

1. Start the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator ﬂashes at the

current tempo.

Adjusting the tempo

The default tempo is 120. (If

a song has been selected,

the song tempo is used.)

Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.

You can set the time signa-

ture, metronome volume,

and metronome tone using

the METRONOME [SET-

TING] button. (See page 78.)

To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–500), use the TEMPO

[DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal

(default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons or the D [–] and [+]

buttons simultaneously.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen.

2. Stop the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

1 2

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

TIP

NO YES

TIP

Basic Operation

40 CLP-175

Recording Your Performance

You can record your perfor-

mance (audio data) to a cas-

sette tape recorder or other

recording devices via the

AUX OUT jacks. (see

page 62.)

This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova

recording function.

You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova key-

board for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part,

then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand

part.

Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the left-

and right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed perfor-

mance or ensemble song one by one to build a song.

Recording vs. Saving:

The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cas-

sette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and

a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the

saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However,

this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense.

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 98 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and

troubleshooting information.

Recording a New Song

Recording to [TRACK 1]

Procedure

If you select a song other

than “P-000: NewSong” and

record on a track that already

has data, the existing data on

the track will be lost.

1. Select “NewSong” for recording.

Press the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons simultaneously.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

4 54

1 3

NOTE

New Song screen

NO YES

CLP-175 41

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Set the tempo in Step 3.

See page 47 for more infor-

mation on recording in Dual/

Split mode.

2. Select a voice.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 30).

Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus.

Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to set the volume level to suit

your preference. You can also use the dial to adjust the level during

playback.

After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not

appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to

return to the New Song screen.

3. Enter record mode and select a recording track.

Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 1] button.

The [TRACK 1] indicator ﬂashes in red. (To cancel recording, press

the [REC] or [TOP] button.)

Set the tempo, if necessary.

If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG

SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once.

You can record data while

using the metronome. The

metronome is not recorded.

When you press the SONG

[START/STOP] button dur-

ing recording, recording is

paused. To resume record-

ing, press the SONG

[START/STOP] button again

or play a note on the key-

board.

4. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a

note on the keyboard.

(Optional) Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start recording.

The recording screen displays the current measure number.

When you press the [REC]

button, recording pauses.

To stop recording, press the [TOP] button. The Clavinova

locates the top of the song.

The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is auto-

matically cancelled.)

NOTE

Record standby screen

NO YES

TIP

Record screen

NO YES

Measure number in recording

TIP

Basic Operation

42 CLP-175

Recording Your Performance

To erase recorded data from

a track, use the Channel

Clear parameter in the

“SONG SETTING” menu.

(See page 76.)

5. Play back the recorded performance.

Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to play back the

recorded performance.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [TOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops when you press the

button.

Re-recording TRACK 1

This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory.

Procedure

1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 41 if you wish to change the previ-

ous settings.

Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 41 to re-record.

The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data.

NOTE

When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance

data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the

SaveToMemory parameter (page 50) or SaveToDisk parameter (page 51) in

the File menu.

CLP-175 43

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Re-recording TRACK 1 partially

This section explains how to record part of a song again.

Procedure

If the playback screen is not

displayed, press one of the

SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]

buttons once.

1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish

to re-record.

Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is dis-

played to move through the measures or play back the

recording and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to

locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part

you wish to re-record.

2. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 41 if you wish to change the previ-

ous settings.

3. Select the recording method and enter record mode.

3-1 Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the

C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the

recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons

repeatedly to specify how the recording should end.

While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following record-

ing method select screen appears.

Starting methods:

Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording

starts.

Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a

note will not be erased.

NOTE

Playback screen

NO YES

Basic Operation

44 CLP-175

Recording Your Performance

Ending methods:

Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be

erased.

Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain.

If you cancel recording by

pressing the [REC] button,

recording stops when you

press the button. If you can-

cel recording by pressing

the [TOP] button, the Clavi-

nova locates the top of the

song.

3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 1] button.

The [TRACK 1] indicator ﬂashes in red.

(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [TOP]

button.)

Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 41.

Recording to [TRACK2]

This section explains how to record another part on the second track.

Procedure

1. Select a voice.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording.

Repeat Step 2 on page 41.

Pressing the [TRACK 1] but-

ton repeatedly toggles

between playback on (the

indicator lights up in green)

and off (the indicator turns

off).

2. Enter record mode and select a recording track.

Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 2] button.

The [TRACK 2] indicator ﬂashes in red. (To cancel recording, press

the [REC] or [TOP] button.)

Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 41.

You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data.

TIP

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

TIP

CLP-175 45

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS]

You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one.

Procedure

1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Record-

ing to [TRACK2]” on page 44 and use the B [–]/[+] but-

tons to select a recording track (3–16).

2. While holding down the [REC] button, press the

[EXTRA TRACKS] button.

Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 41.

Other recording techniques

Adding data to or recording over an existing song

The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P-

000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs

[P-001—P-050], commercially-available music data [see page 60], or your old recorded performances [see

page 48]).

Procedure

If you record on a track that

already has data, the exist-

ing data on the track will be

lost.

1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050).

Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000:

NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on

page 40. To select a song from commercial music data sold in stores or

from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2 on page 57.

To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 40 to 45.

NO YES

select a recording track (3-16)

NOTE

Basic Operation

46 CLP-175

Recording Your Performance

Changing a voice or tempo after recording

You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo.

You can also change these elements in the middle of a song.

Procedure

Before changing a voice or

tempo, set the starting

method to “Normal.”

(page 43)

When the starting method is

set to “KeyOn,” you cannot

change a voice or tempo.

Refer to “Questions about

Operations and Functions”

on page 104 for information

on the settings that can be

changed here.

Change the tempo in Step 4.

The edited settings (except

for the tempo setting) will be

saved in memory and you

will not be able to restore the

previous settings. Proceed

with caution.

1. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG

SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons.

2. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the

song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/

[+] buttons.

3. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.).

For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E.

Piano2, use the voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons to

select E.Piano2.

When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ]

[] buttons once to return to the song select screen.

4. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the

track to change.

The indicator for the selected track lights up in red.

Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.

At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the SONG [START/

STOP] button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded

data.

5. Press the [TOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode.

NOTE

TIP

CAUTION

CLP-175 47

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG

BALANCE]

While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the play-

back of the recorded parts and your current performance.

Procedure

Some commercially-avail-

able music data contains

extremely high volumes.

When using such data,

please adjust the song bal-

ance.

The song balance setting is

also used during playback.

(See page 57.)

1. Move [SONG BALANCE] to the left or right to make

adjustments.

Recording in Dual or Split mode

When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The follow-

ing table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice.

CAUTION

When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see

page 45), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.

In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording.

Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16

If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used.

Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded.

TIP

SONG BALANCE

SONG KEYBOARD

Your playing volume will

be lower.

The song playback

volume will be lower.

Tracks assigned for

recording

Dual Split Split+Dual

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

↓↓↓ ↓↓↓ ↓↓↓

Tracks

used for

record-

ing

MAIN

(voice 1)

TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn

LEFT

(voice 1)

–

TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1

MAIN

(voice 2)

TRACK3 TRACK4

TRACKn

–

TRACK3 TRACKn +2

LEFT

(voice 2)

––

TRACK4 TRACKn +3

TIP

Basic Operation

48 CLP-175

Saving Recorded Songs and

Handling the Files...[FILE]

File

A ﬁle contains a group of

data. On the Clavinova, a

song ﬁle includes song data

and a song number.

Memory

Memory is a location inside

the Clavinova in which you

can save and edit data.

Formatting (Initializing)

Floppy disks are a conve-

nient media that allow you to

save various data for per-

sonal computers and other

devices. There are many

ways (formats) to save data

on ﬂoppy disks, depending

on the device. Therefore,

you need to prepare a ﬂoppy

disk by assigning a format

before you can use it on a

particular type of device.

This operation is called “for-

matting.”

Character code

Type of characters

Please note that the copy

features are intended for

your personal use only.

File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song ﬁles

(e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), copy and format disks, and

change the characters on the screen.

The following parameters are provided for these operations:

Clavinova memory

The Clavinova has the following three types of memory:

• Current memory:

This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit

the currently-selected song before playback or recording.

• Preset song memory:

This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs.

• Storage memory:

This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded

from ﬂoppy disk.

When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song

memory, Storage memory, or ﬂoppy disk, into Current memory.

You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn

off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Stor-

age memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are

lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Stor-

age memory or on a ﬂoppy disk (see pages 50, 51).

In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is

referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory

song,” and a song on a ﬂoppy disk is a “Disk song”.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Settings

Parameter

name

Reference

page

Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory

SaveToMemory

Saves recorded and other songs on ﬂoppy disks SaveToDisk 51

Deletes song data from Clavinova momery or ﬂoppy

disk

DeleteSong 52

Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 53

Copies data from ﬂoppy disk to ﬂoppy disk

CopyDisk 54

Formats a ﬂoppy disk FormatDisk 55

Automatically open a song when the disk is inserted FD

SongAutoOpen

Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 56

POWER

TEMPO

VARIATION

BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUS ON

OFFREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

AFC

SETTING

AFC

SETTINGSTART/STOP

NO YES

DOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

METRONOME

DEMO

SONG BALANCE

MASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

SONG

SETTING

FILE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

MAXMIN

EXIT

CONTRAST

EFFECT

Floppy disk

Clavinova

Preset song

memory

Storage memory

Current memory

CLP-175 49

Basic Operation

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Basic ﬁle operation

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 98 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take.

Procedure

1. Select a song, or have a ﬂoppy disk ready.

Select a song you wish to save or rename.

(Optional) Insert a ﬂoppy disk for copying or formatting into the disk

drive.

2. Access the File menu.

Press the [FILE] button.

To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.

3. Select the desired parameter.

Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired

item from the following:

“SaveToMemory”, “SaveToDisk”, “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”,

“CopyDisk”, “FormatDisk”, “FDSongAutoOpen”, “CharacterCode”.

4. Set the parameter or execute the command.

Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons.

For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corre-

sponding section below.

5. Close the File menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

2 3 3

NO YES

Basic Operation

50 CLP-175

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage

memory...[SaveToMemory]

If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded

song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory or to a ﬂoppy disk. (To save a song to a ﬂoppy

disk, refer to the next section [SaveToDisk].) You can also save the preset songs, disk songs, and additional or

overwriting recordings (page 45) to Storage memory.

Procedure

See page 49 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure of Step 4.

4-1 Name the song.

To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons.

To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons.

To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer

than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and

scroll the name.

“Execute?→”: Do you wish

to execute the operation?

“Sure?→”: Are you sure?

“Executing”: The Clavinova

is executing the operation.

“Completed”: The operation

is complete.

4-2 Execute the operation.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→”.

“Sure?

→” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again

to conﬁrm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [–

(NO)] button.)

The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the opera-

tion. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears.

The song is automatically numbered as “M—,” where “M” means

“Memory” and “—” is a number.

Do not turn off the power

while the screen displays

“Executing.”

If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavi-

nova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them.

NO YES

TIP

•You can change the type

of characters on the

screen using the Char-

acterCode parameter.

• When you select a saved

song later, the name with

an extension “.MID” will

appear.

TERMINOLOGY

CAUTION

TIP

CLP-175 51

Basic Operation

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Saving recorded or other songs to ﬂoppy

disk...[SaveToDisk]

Songs you record, memory songs, or recordings you added or recorded over (page 45) previously-recorded

memory songs can be saved on a ﬂoppy disk.

Procedure

The song data is saved in

the SMF format (format 0).

Therefore, you can play the

disk on instruments that

support the SMF format.

To specify a folder on the

disk as the save location ...

When the “Sure?->” display

appears, press either the C

[

–]/[+] buttons to display the

folder. Use

the C [

–]/[+] but-

tons to select the folder.

You can use the D [+] button

to enter a folder. Press the D

[–] button to return to the

previous (higher) level.

You cannot create folders on

the CLP-175.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure of Step 4.

4. Make sure that a formatted ﬂoppy disk (page 55) is

inserted in the disk drive.

Follow the steps for the [SaveToMemory] operation (see page 50) to

name and save the song.

The song is automatically numbered as “D—,” where “D” means

“Disk” and “—” is a number.

NO YES

TIP

CAUTION

Basic Operation

52 CLP-175

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a

ﬂoppy disk...[DeleteSong]

To delete a Current song,

select “ALL” for the Channel-

Clear parameter in the

“SONG SETTING” menu

(page 76). Alternatively,

press the SONG SELECT

[][] buttons simulta-

neously to display “Song

Changed Save?”. This

means “A song has been

edited. Do you wish to save

the change?” Press the B [–

(NO)] button. The Current

song is deleted and a blank

“NewSong” is selected.

You can delete Memory songs and Disk songs, but not Preset songs or Cur-

rent songs.

Procedure

If you select a Memory song

or Disk song, deleting the

song does not erase song

data from Current memory.

However, if you return to the

song select screen, song

information other than the

song name is replaced by “-

-------------”.

After you delete a song, the

Clavinova automatically

updates the song numbers.

When you delete a folder from

disk, all ﬁles within that folder

will be deleted.

If a folder is displayed for a

disk song, the [ / ] indicator

is displayed in the lower

right of the screen. In this

case, you can use the D [+]

button to open the folder.

Press the D [–] button to

return to the previous

(upper) level.

Never turn off the power or

remove the ﬂoppy disk while

[Executing] is displayed.

See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure of Step 4.

4-1 Select a song to delete.

Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song.

4-2 Execute the operation.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

TIP

NO YES

TIP

→

CAUTION

CLP-175 53

Basic Operation

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Renaming a song...[RenameSong]

You can change a song’s title except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong].

Procedure

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

After you rename a song,

the Clavinova sorts songs

alphabetically and renum-

bers them.

See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure for Step 4.

4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory]

section (page 50).

NO YES

CAUTION

TIP

Basic Operation

54 CLP-175

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Copying data from one ﬂoppy disk to

another...[CopyDisk]

You can copy the entire contents of one ﬂoppy disk to another ﬂoppy disk.

Procedure

Use the same type of disk

(2DD or 2HD) for the desti-

nation disk as the source

disk.

See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure for Step 4.

4-1 Make sure that a formatted ﬂoppy disk is inserted in

the disk drive.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?→.”

Insrt Target Disk:

Insert the destination (tar-

get) disk.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

4-3 When the screen indicates “Insrt Target Disk”, eject

the source disk and insert the destination disk.

When the copy operation is complete, the Clavinova displays “Com-

pleted.”

NO YES

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

CAUTION

CLP-175 55

Basic Operation

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Formatting a ﬂoppy disk...[FormatDisk]

You can format a ﬂoppy disk so that it can be used with the Clavinova.

Procedure

Refer to page 49 for the basic procedure.

Perform the following operations in step 4.

4-1 Make sure that the formatted ﬂoppy disk is inserted in

the disk drive.

Do not turn off the power or

eject the ﬂoppy disk while

the screen displays “Execut-

ing.”

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Exe-

cute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

NO YES

CAUTION

Basic Operation

56 CLP-175

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Automatically open a song when the disk is inserted

[FDSongAutoOpen]

Specify whether a song will automatically be opened when you insert a disk.

Procedure

Refer to page 49 for the basic procedure.

Perform the following operation in step 4.

4 Use the D [–]/[+] buttons to select ON or OFF.

Changing the type of characters on screen...[Char-

acterCode]

You can change the type of characters that appear on screen.

The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.”

Options: International, Japanese

Character list

[International]

[Japanese]

NO YES

CLP-175 57

Basic Operation

Playing Back Recorded Songs and

Commercially-available Music Data

See page 59 for information

on the types of song data

that can be played on the

Clavinova.

Change the Clavinova’s

character type ([Character-

Cord]) as appropriate for the

selected song.

You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 40) as well

as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along

with the playback.

Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the

instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is

about 200–300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each

song.

Playing back a song

If you want to play back a disk song, insert the ﬂoppy disk into the disk drive.

Procedure

1. Display the song select screen.

Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons.

2. Select the desired song.

2-1 Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “Pre-

setSong,” “MemorySong,” or “DiskSong”.

If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavi-

nova displays “MemorySong.” If a ﬂoppy disk that contains song data is

inserted in the drive, the Clavinova displays “DiskSong”.

2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to

select a song.

TIP

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

1 2-2

32-2 54

2-1

[SONG BALANCE]

TEMPO [DOWN][UP]

You can enjoy ensemble

performance by yourself.

Record the parts for a four-

handed song or a piano

duet, then play the recorded

part while playing the other

part on the keyboard.

Use the SongRepeat

parameter in the “SONG

SETTING” menu (page 77)

to select repeat playback of

all songs or repeat playback

of a single song.

If a folder is displayed for a

disk song, the [ / ] indicator

is displayed in the lower right

of the screen. In this case,

you can use the D [+] button

to open the folder. Press the

D [–] button to return to the

previous (upper) level.

If the song name extends

beyond what can be dis-

played in the screen, you

can press the D [+] button to

move toward the right in

steps of one character.

Press the D [–] button to

move back to the left in

steps of one character.

TIP

→

TIP

Song select screen

NO YES

Basic Operation

58 CLP-175

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

3. Start playback.

Press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Syn-

chro Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called

the “Synchro Start” function.

To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [TOP] button

and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. The SONG [START/STOP]

indicator ﬂashes.

Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [TOP] button while the Clavi-

nova is in Synchro Start standby mode.

Bar: measure

You can play the metronome

along with the song play-

back. When you stop play-

back, the metronome is also

stopped.

In the song select screen:

You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by

using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is

playing or stopped.

You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can

also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the

voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback

parts and your current performance using the [SONG BALANCE] slider. (See

page 47.)

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

Adjusting the tempo

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s

original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simul-

taneously.

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

4. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [TOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops when you press the

button.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the C[–]

button while playback is

stopped in the middle of

the song to locate the top

of the song.

However, if you have

selected a disc song and

there is a folder before

the song, the folder will

appear on the display

when you press the

SONG SELECT [ ]

[] buttons or C [–]/[+]

buttons during song

playback.

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the C[–

] button during playback

to restart playback from

the top of the song.

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the

C[+] button during play-

back to start playback

from the next song.

NO YES

The bar number in playback

CLP-175 59

Basic Operation

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

5. Return to the main screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

Eject the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive if you have been playing a

disk song.

Turning track playback on and off

You can practice a part or

phrase using the FromToRe-

peat (page 76) and Phrase-

Mark parameters (page 77)

in the “SONG SETTING”

menu.

When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that con-

tain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While

the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the

indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track

buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned

off.

Supported song data type

Data formats that can be played on the CLP-175

The Clavinova CLP-175 plays song data in the following formats:

Disk format:

A structured method for writ-

ing data to disk.

Floppy disk format

3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format

3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format

Sequence format:

A structured method for

recording performance data.

Sequence format

SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1

ESEQ

Performance data recorded on the CLP-175 is saved in the SMF for-

mat 0 in a ﬂoppy disk.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

Basic Operation

60 CLP-175

Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data

Voice arrangement format:

A structured method for

numbering the voices for

assignment.

Vo ice arrangement format

XG voice arrangement

GM system level 1 voice arrangement

DOC voice arrangement

Performance data recorded with preset XG voices on the CLP-175 can

be played on other XG-compatible instruments.

See page 6 of the separate “Reference Booklet” for the XG voice list.

Refer to “Data compatibility” on page 109 for more information on

formats.

TERMINOLOGY

CLP-175 61

Basic Operation

Connections

Connectors

CAUTION

Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before

turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or

damage to the components may occur.

Connect or disconnect the

pedal when the power is off.

1 AUX PEDAL jack

A separately sold FC7 foot controller or FC4/FC5 foot switch can be con-

nected to this jack. By using an FC7 you can control the volume while playing

to add expression to your performance, or control various other functions. By

using an FC4/FC5, you can switch various selected functions on/off. To select

the function that will be controlled, use the [VOICE SETTING] parameter

[AuxPedal] (See page 86). The SONG [START/STOP] function can also be

assigned to a foot switch (See page 96).

2 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors

Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.

Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page)

to MIDI when you use these connectors.

3 HOST SELECT switch

This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or

personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63

for more information.)

4 TO HOST jack

This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Con-

necting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.)

5 USB jack

This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Con-

necting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.)

TO HOST

USB

MIDIAUX PEDAL

THRU

HOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

OUTIN

AUX INAUX OUT

L+RRL

L+RRRL

LEVEL FIXED

3 5

TIP

Basic Operation

62 CLP-175

Connections

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] dial setting affects

the input signal from the AUX

IN jacks, but the [REVERB],

[CHORUS], and [BRIL-

LIANCE] (page 32) settings

do not.

If you connect the Clavinova

to a monaural device, use

only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack

or AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack.

Do not route the output from

the AUX OUT jacks to the

AUX IN jacks. That is, when

you connect an external

audio device to the AUX

OUT jacks, do not connect

the audio device to the

Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If

you make this connection,

the signal input at the AUX

IN jacks will be output from

AUX OUT. This creates an

audio loop, causing audio

oscillation and abnormal

playback, and leading to

malfunction of both pieces of

equipment.

Use audio cables and adap-

tor plugs with no resistance.

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] setting will not

affect the sound that is out-

put from AUX OUT (LEVEL

FIXED).

6 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,

allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavi-

nova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connec-

tion.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, ﬁrst

turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order

when you turn the power off.

7 AUX OUT [R][L] Pin jacks (LEVEL FIXED), [R][L/L+R] Phone jacks

These jacks let you connect the Clavinova to your stereo system etc. to play at

higher volumes, or connect a cassette recorder etc. to record your playing.

Use audio cables to make connections as shown in the diagram.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio sys-

tem, ﬁrst turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system.

Reverse this order when you turn the power off.

TIP

CAUTION

TIP

AUX IN

Clavinova

phone plug

(standard)

audio cable

Plug shape depends

on the device.

AUX OUT

AUX IN

L+RR

Tone Generator

AUX IN

Clavinova

audio cable

Stereo

RCA

pin plug

RCA

pin plug

When these are connected (with RCA

pin plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is

output to the external device at a fixed

level, regardless of the [MASTER

VOLUME] dial setting.

AUX OUT

L+RRRL

LEVEL FIXED

phone plug

(standard)

To powered speakers

When these are connected (with

standard phone plugs), you can

use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial

to adjust the volume of the sound

output to the external device.

CLP-175 63

Basic Operation

Connections

Connecting a personal computer

You can connect the [TO HOST], MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU], or [USB] connector of the Clavinova to your

personal computer and enjoy using the Clavinova in conjunction with musical software on your computer.

There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer:

1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 64)

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 66)

3. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB jack (page 67)

For more information, refer to the following pages.

When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer

before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn

on the power to the computer ﬁrst, then to the Clavinova.

If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must disconnect the cable from the

[TO HOST] jack or [USB] jack. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a cable is left connected.

The connectors that can be used will depend on the setting of the HOST SELECT switch.

HOST SELECT switch setting Usable connectors

[MIDI] [MIDI] connectors (all: [IN][OUT][THRU])

[PC-2], [Mac] [TO HOST] jack

[USB] [USB] jack

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection,” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners,

what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer

system (the manual is not written for any speciﬁc models). The document is available as a PDF ﬁle (in

English) at the following Internet address:

Clavinova Web site (English only): http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library: http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

TIP

Basic Operation

64 CLP-175

Connections

1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack

Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack.

In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special

MIDI interface.

Connection

Use a special serial cable (page 65) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavi-

nova’s TO HOST jack.

TO HOST

Windows Macintosh

modem port

Clavinova

RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin)

TO HOSTHOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

Note for Windows users (regarding the MIDI driver)

To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a

speciﬁc MIDI driver (the Yamaha CBX driver for Windows). You can download this driver from XG

Library on the Yamaha Web site (http://www.yamaha-xg.com) or install from the Accessory CD-ROM

included with the Clavinova.

CLP-175 65

Basic Operation

Connections

Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments

According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables.

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer.

• Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock)

• Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps)

If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different

settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate.

8 (CTS)

7 (RTS)

2 (RxD)

5 (GND)

3 (TxD)

• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin)

8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent)

mini DIN

8-pin

D-sub

9-pin

mini DIN

8-pin

2 (HSK i)

1 (HSK O)

5 (RxD-)

4 (GND)

3 (TxD-)

8 (RxD+)

7 (GP-)

6 (TxD+)

mini DIN

8-pin

• Macintosh

System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-TG or equivalent)

mini DIN 8-pin

Pin numbers (view from front)

D-sub 9-pin

45321

9876

• Pin assignment

The following diagram shows the pin assignments

for each cable.

TIP

Basic Operation

66 CLP-175

Connections

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors

Connection

Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables.

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

MIDI OUT

MIDI

Windows

Macintosh

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

Clavinova

MIDI interface

MIDI

THRU

HOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

OUTIN

CLP-175 67

Basic Operation

Connections

3. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB jack

If you connect the Clavinova to your computer, you can transfer MIDI data between your computer

and the Clavinova. You can also use the included File Utility (software for your computer) to transfer

ﬁles between your computer and the internal memory of the Clavinova.

Connections

Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the [USB] jack on the Clavinova.

There are two types of USB connectors: A and B. The USB jack on the Clavinova accepts a B-type connector. Connect

the A-type connector of the USB cable to the USB port on your computer. Connect the B-type connector to the USB jack

on the Clavinova.

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “USB.”

computer Clavinova

POWER

TEMPO

VARIATION

BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT

CHORUS ON

OFFREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

AFC

SETTING

AFC

SETTINGSTART/STOP

NO YES

DOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

METRONOME

DEMO

SONG BALANCE

MASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

SONG

SETTING

FILE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

MAXMIN

EXIT

CONTRAST

EFFECT

USB cable

USB

TO HOST

USB

HOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

TIP

About the USB driver

You must install the speciﬁed USB driver (YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver) in your computer before you can

transfer data between the computer and the Clavinova.

The YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver can be installed from the Accessory CD-ROM included with the Clavi-

nova.

The YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver supports the following OS versions.

Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional

Mac OS 8.6–9.2.2 (Mac OS X and Mac Classic environments are not supported.)

Basic Operation

68 CLP-175

Connections

About the USB connection

•In order to use MIDI on your computer, you will need application software that is appropriate for your

computer and that meets your needs.

•If you want to use a USB cable to connect the Clavinova to your computer, you must connect the USB

cable before turning on the power of the Clavinova.

Also, do not turn the power of the Clavinova on or off while application software that uses USB MIDI is

running.

•The Clavinova will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made.

•When using a USB cable to connect the Clavinova to your computer, make the connection directly

without passing through a USB hub.

•Depending on the state of your computer, the operating state of the Clavinova may become unstable.

Do not use your computer in a way that causes it to enter an unstable state.

CAUTION

•If you turn the power of the Clavinova on/off or connect/disconnect the USB cable in the following

states, problems will occur in the computer system, possibly causing it to “freeze” (hang up), or causing

the Clavinova to stop functioning.

-While installing the driver

-While starting-up or shutting-down the operating system

-While your computer is suspended (sleeping)

-While a MIDI application is running

•Performing the following actions may cause your computer to hang up or the Clavinova to stop func-

tioning.

-Rapidly turning the power on/off or connecting/disconnecting the cable

- Shifting to power-conservation (sleep) mode while MIDI data is being transferred, or returning from

sleep mode

-Connecting/disconnecting the cable while the power of the Clavinova is on

-Turning the power of the Clavinova on/off, starting up your computer, or installing the driver while a

large amount of data is being transferred

CLP-175 69

Detailed Settings

70 CLP-175

Detailed Settings

You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as ﬁne tuning the pitch,

selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. For the basic procedure to make these settings,

refer to page 97.

Parameter List

The following parameters are available.

Recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

Metronome METRONOME [SETTING]

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Correcting note timing Quantize 75

Specifying whether playback starts immediately

along with the ﬁrst voicing

QuickPlay 76

Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 76

Deleting data by each channel ChannelClear 76

Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly FromToRepeat 76

Playing back the phrase speciﬁed by the phrase

number

PhraseMark 77

Playing back a song repeatedly SongRepeat 77

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Metronome time signature TimeSignature 78

Metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 78

Metronome voice MetronomeSound 78

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 71

Detailed Settings

Voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode, parameters with the “ ” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

iAFC [iAFC SETTING]

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Octave* Octave 80

Volume level* Volume 80

Position of right and left channels* Pan 80

Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Detune 80

Reverb type ReverbType 81

Reverb depth* ReverbSend 81

Chorus type ChorusType 81

Chorus depth* ChorusSend 81

Chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 82

Select the DSP type* DSP Type (DSP) 82

Set the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* VibeRotorSpeed 82

Turn the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off* VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff) 83

Adjust the speed of the rotary speaker* RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed) 83

Adjust the DSP effect depth* DSPDepth 83

Adjust the brightness of the sound* Brightness 83

Adjust the resonance effect* HarmonicContent (Harmonic) 83

Adjust the low-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq) 84

Adjust the low-range gain (boost/cut) of the equal-

izer*

EQ LowGain 84

Adjust the high-range frequency of the equalizer* EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq) 84

Adjust the high-range gain (boost/cut) of the equal-

izer*

EQ HighGain 84

Touch sensitivity* TouchSense 85

Right pedal function RPedal 85

Center pedal function MPedal 85

Left pedal function LPedal 86

Auxiliary pedal function AuxPedal 86

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Select the iAFC type iAFC Type 87

Adjust the iAFC depth iAFC Depth 87

Calibrate (automatically adjust) iAFC Calibration 88

Restore the basic iAFC settings iAFC Default 88

Detailed Settings

72 CLP-175

Detailed Settings

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

[OTHER SETTING]

Settings Parameter name Reference page

MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 90

Specify the MIDI receive channel MidiInChannel 90

Local control on/off LocalControl 91

Selecting performance from the keyboard or song

data for MIDI transmission

MidiOutSelect 91

Type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 91

Type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 91

Transmitting the initial settings InitialSetup 92

Voice data bulk dump VoiceBulkDump 92

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 93

Make ﬁne pitch adjustments Tune 93

Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 93

Selecting a scale Scale 94

Specifying the Split Point SplitPoint 94

Change the key Transpose 94

Specify the depth of the Soft pedal SoftPedalDepth 95

Depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 95

Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 95

Specify the volume of the key-off sound KeyOffSamplingDepth 95

Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone VibraphonePedalMode 95

Assign the SONG [START/STOP] function to the

pedal

PedalStart/Stop 96

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 96

Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts

to affect the sound

HalfPedalPoint 96

Pitch bend range PitchBendRange 96

Switch the speaker on/off Speaker 97

Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown MemoryBackUp 97

Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 97

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 73

Detailed Settings

Making detailed settings

Procedure

1. Access a setting menu.

Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], MET-

RONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [iAFC SETTING],

[MIDI SETTING], or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corre-

sponding setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu.

2. Select the desired parameter or part.

Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] but-

tons repeatedly as required.

3. Set the parameter or part.

Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use

the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons

to select or set the option.

To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons

simultaneously.

DEMO

TEMPO

SONG BALANCEMASTER VOLUME

SONG KEYBOARD

VARIATION BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

GRAND

PIANO 1

CHURCH

ORGAN

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT CHORUSREVERB

GRAND

PIANO 2

JAZZ

ORGAN

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

SONG

SETTING

FILE SETTINGSTART/STOP

UPDOWN

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

TRACK

TOP

EXTRA

TRACKS

TRACK

START

STOP

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

SYNCHRO START

REC

SONG

METRONOME

MAXMIN

EXITEXIT

CONTRAST

OFF

AFC

SETTING

AFC

EFFECT

2 3 5

3 4

1 1

Detailed Settings

74 CLP-175

Detailed Settings

4. Write, execute, or save the data.

There are two ways to respond to the messages.

If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears:

Press the B [+(YES)] button to display conﬁrmation ([Sure?→]). To

proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays

“Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it

displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous

screen.

To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B

[+(YES)] button.

If “Set?→” appears:

Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova dis-

plays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete,

it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previ-

ous screen.

However, the “Completed” display that appears when [Calibration]

(page 88) and [VoiceBulkDump] (page 92) is ﬁnished will not change

back to the previous display after three seconds. Press any button on

the panel to return to the previous display.

5. Close the setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

NO YES

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 75

Detailed settings for recording

and playback [SONG SETTING]

You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“Preset-

Song”), memory songs (“MemorySong”), or disk songs (“DiskSong”) (see page 57).

Procedure

Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting”

menu.

You can correct the timing of notes. For example,

you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or

sixteenth notes, or make the entire feel of a song

more lively (with a swing type of rhythm).

•Changes are made by song.

•You can also listen to the sound while changing

the setting. To change the data, you need to

respond to “Execute?

→.”

See the procedure on page 73.

Notes for which you can adjust the timing:

If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the

Clavinova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which

enables you to make the entire feel of a song more

lively and swinging.

Setting range:

0% - 100%

If you select “1/8” for correction:

Save the edited song data to memory or a disk.

(See page 50.)

[SONG SETTING]

Correcting note timing

[Quantize]

Specifies the type of note.

Stores the changed value.

NO YES

[OFF]

[1/4]

[1/8]

[1/12]

[1/16]

[1/24]

quarter note

eighth note

eighth note triplets

sixteenth note

sixteenth note triplets

3 3

Performance data

Swing rate = 50% : not swinging

Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) :

The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed.

Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) :

The timing of even beat notes is slightly early.

Swing rate = 67% :

The timing of the even beat notes is moved to

the third beat of the triplets.

TIP

Detailed Settings

76 CLP-175

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

This parameter enables you to specify whether a

song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song

with a silence prior to the ﬁrst note, should be

played from the ﬁrst note or from the top of the bar

(rest or blank).

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

[On] Playing from the ﬁrst note

[Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a

rest or blank)

You can select a single channel to listen to its con-

tents. Playback starts from the ﬁrst note.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16

Usually, channels that do not contain any data are not

displayed. However, for some songs, all channels

(including the channels that contain no data) may be dis-

played.

You can delete data from each of 16 channels.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels)

• Channels that do not contain any data are not dis-

played. However, for some songs, all channels

(including the channels that contain no data) may be

displayed.

•Save the edited song data to memory or disk.

(See page 50.)

You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song

to play back repeatedly.

• Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the

beat speciﬁed as the end point.

•If you start playing back a song with “Repeat

On” selected, the count down starts, followed by

the repeated playback of the speciﬁed part until

you press the [TOP] button.

•If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts.

See the procedure on page 73.

Specifying whether playback

starts immediately along with

the ﬁrst voicing [QuickPlay]

Auditioning the channels

[ChannelListen]

NO YES

Use these buttons to select the

desired channel for playback.

Playback continues as long

as you press and hold down this button.

NO YES

TIP

Deleting data from each chan-

nel [ChannelClear]

Specifying the range and play-

ing back repeatedly [From-

ToRepeat]

Press this button to delete data.

Use these buttons to select the

desired channel for deletion.

NO YES

TIP

Use these buttons

to specify the end point

of the repeated range.

Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.”

Use these buttons

to specify the start point

of the repeated range.

NO YES

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 77

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

Use the following buttons to specify the range to be

repeated during song playback.

C [–]/[+].......speciﬁes the start point of the repeat.

D [–]/[+].......speciﬁes the end point of the repeat.

When you select another song, the speciﬁed range is auto-

matically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off.

If you select a song from an ensemble collection

disk, such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or

one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can specify

phrase numbers in the score to play back from the

score from the mark point, or to play back the

phrase repeatedly.

•If you start playing back a song with “Repeat

On” selected, the count down starts, followed by

the repeated playback of the speciﬁed phrase

until you press the [TOP] button.

•If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback

starts from the speciﬁed phrase.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range of the phrase number:

Off (not speciﬁed)

1 - the last phrase number of the song

If you select any song other than those from the

“Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for

Piano” disks, you can select only “Off.”

You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single

song selected from the 50 preset songs or from the

ﬂoppy disks.

•When you start playback, the Clavinova plays

the song you selected using the front panel, then

starts repeat playback of the speciﬁed songs until

you press the [TOP] button.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

[DiskSongs] All songs in the ﬂoppy disk

inserted in the disk drive

[MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s

memory

[Disk+Memory] All songs from “DiskSongs” and

“MemorySongs”

[PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs

[ALL] All songs from “DiskSongs,”

“MemorySongs,” and “Preset-

Songs”

[OneSong] One song selected from the front

panel

Playing back the phrase speci-

ﬁed by the phrase number

[PhraseMark]

TIP

NOTE

Use these buttons to specify the phrase number.

Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.”

NO YES

Playing back a song repeatedly

[SongRepeat]

Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs.

Use these buttons to select “On.”

NO YES

Detailed Settings

78 CLP-175

Detailed settings for the metro-

nome METRONOME [SETTING]

You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome.

Procedure

Press the METRONOME [SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu.

See the procedure on page 73.

For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+]

buttons to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to

select “4.”

Setting range for the numerator:

1 - 16

Setting options for the denominator:

2, 4, and 8

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

0-127

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

[BellOff] Click (standard metronome

sound)

[EnglishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English

[GermanVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German

[JapaneseVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japa-

nese

[FrenchVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French

[SpanishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish

[BellOn] Click and bell

To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.”

METRONOME [SETTING]

Setting the metronome time

signature [TimeSignature]

Setting the metronome vol-

ume level [MetronomeVolume]

Use these buttons

to set the denominator

of the time signature.

Use these buttons

to set the numerator

of the time signature.

NO YES

Selecting the metronome

voice [MetronomeSound]

NO YES

TIP

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 79

Detailed settings for the voices

[VOICE SETTING]

This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects.

You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the

notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings.

Procedure

1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Set-

ting” menu.

2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the

voice.

The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice.

[Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode)

[Main

× Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode)

[Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode)

[Left

× Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode)

[VOICE SETTING]

Detailed Settings

80 CLP-175

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for

Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

Parameter names enclosed in parentheses ( ) are dis-

played in Dual mode.

The pitch of a note can be shifted upward or down-

ward in steps of an octave.

See the procedure on page 73.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

–2 (two octaves lower) - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2

(two octaves higher)

You can set the volume level for each voice part.

See the procedure on page 73.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You can specify the position in the stereo image

from which you hear the sound.

See the procedure on page 73.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right)

The pitch of the two sounds selected in Dual mode

can be “skewed” slightly away from each other.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

–20–+20 (Positive (+) settings will raise the pitch

of the ﬁrst sound and lower the pitch of the second

sound. Negative (–) settings will do the opposite.)

Setting the octave [Octave]*

Setting the volume level

[Volume]*

TIP

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2)

NO YES

Setting the position of right

and left channels [Pan]*

Make ﬁne adjustments to the

pitch (only in Dual mode)

[Detune]

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

NO YES

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 81

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left”

and “Left

× Layer.”

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Room Simulates reverberation in a room.

Hall1 Simulates reverberation in a concert hall.

Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of

“Hall1.”

Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instru-

ment sound.

Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a

metal plate.

The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend

parameter is set to “0.”

See the procedure on page 73.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left”

and “Left

× Layer.”

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Chorus Adds a rich, spacious sound.

Celeste Adds swell and a spacious sound.

Flanger Adds swell effects of an ascending or

descending jet plane.

See the procedure on page 73.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

Selecting the reverb type

[ReverbType]

Setting the reverb depth

[ReverbSend]*

TIP

NO YES

TIP

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

NO YES

Selecting the chorus type

[Chorus Type]

Setting the chorus depth

[ChorusSend]*

TIP

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

NO YES

Detailed Settings

82 CLP-175

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for

each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/

off setting for the voice automatically changes

according to this parameter.

Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is

disabled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

On/Off

You can select other effects (than reverb and cho-

rus).

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and

right positions.

DelayLR Delay applied at left and right

positions.

Echo Echo-like delay

CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed.

Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic

effect.

RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary

speaker.

Tremolo The volume level changes in

rapid cycles.

VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibra-

phone.

AutoPanThe sound pans left to right and

back and forth.

Phaser The phase changes periodically,

swelling the sound.

AutoWahThe center frequency of the wah

ﬁlter changes periodically.

SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a

piano soundboard.

Off No effect.

Rotor= The rotating portion of an electrical device etc.

This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected

for the DSP Type parameter explained above.

This sets the speed of the vibrato effect that is

applied when you have selected Vibraphone and

are using the VibeRotor pedal.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

1–10

Setting the chorus on/off

[ChorusOnOff]

Selecting the DSP type*

[DSP Type (DSP)]

TIP

NO YES

Setting the speed of the vibra-

phone vibrato effect* [VibeRo-

torSpeed(RotorSpeed)]

TERMINOLOGY

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 83

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected

for the DSP Type parameter explained above.

It turns on/off the vibrato effect that is applied

when you use the VibeRotor pedal.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

On/Off

This will be displayed only if RotarySpeaker is

selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above.

It sets the rotation speed of the rotary speaker effect.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Slow/Fast

This sets the depth of the DSP effect (page 82).

Some DSP Type settings do not allow you to set the

DSPDepth.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

1 (output only the original sound with almost no

effect applied)–127 (output only the sound pro-

cessed by the effect)

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

–64–+63

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

–64–+63

Resonance can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone, mak-

ing the sound brighter and harder.

Turning the vibraphone

vibrato effect on/off* [VibeRo-

torOnOff (RotorOnOff)]

Setting the rotation speed of

the rotary speaker* [Rota-

rySpeed (Rot.Speed)]

Adjusting the depth of the

DSP effect* [DSPDepth]

NO YES

Adjusting the brightness of the

sound* [Brightness]

Adjusting the resonance

effect* [HarmonicContent

(Harmonic)]

TIP

Detailed Settings

84 CLP-175

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

Equalizer:

An audio equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into

multiple regions and enables the user to adjust the rela-

tive amplitude of each region.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

32 Hz–2.0 kHz

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

–12–+12 dB

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

500 Hz–16.0 kHz

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

–12–+12 dB

Adjusting the low-range fre-

quency of the equalizer*

[EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq)]

Adjusting the low-range gain

(amount of boost/cut) of the

equalizer* [EQ LowGain]

TERMINOLOGY

Low Gain

High Gain

Low Freq. High Freq.

NO YES

Adjusting the high-range fre-

quency of the equalizer*

[EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq)]

Adjusting the high-range gain

(amount of boost/cut) of the

equalizer* [EQ HighGain]

NO YES

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 85

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

This parameter enables determines the manner

and degree to which the volume level changes in

response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard

you play). Since the volume level of the harpsi-

chords and pipe organs do not change regardless of

how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for

these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.)

See the procedure on page 73.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127

(loudest and ﬁxed)

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Sustain ON/OFF switch type damper

SustainCont Damper that sustains the sound

proportionately to how deeply

you press the pedal

Sostenuto Sostenuto (page 31)

Soft Soft (page 31)

Expression A function that lets you create

changes in dynamics (volume) as

you play

PitchBend Up A function that smoothly raises

the pitch

PitchBend Down

A function that smoothly lowers

the pitch

RotarySpeed Change the rotational speed of

the JazzOrgan rotary speaker

(switch between fast/slow each

time you press the pedal)

Viberotor Switch the vibraphone vibrato

on/off (switch on/off each time

you press the pedal)

Off No function

Normal setting:

SustainCont

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Same as “Specifying the function of the right

pedal,” above.

Normal Setting:

Sostenuto

Setting the touch sensitivity

[TouchSense]*

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Setting the right pedal func-

tion [RPedal]

Setting the center pedal func-

tion [MPedal]

NO YES

Detailed Settings

86 CLP-175

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Same as “Right pedal function assignment”

(page 85).

Normal Setting:

Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and

VibraPhone)

Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRo-

tor)

You can assign a function to the pedal connected to

the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Same as “Right pedal function assignment”

(page 85).

Normal setting:

Expression

Optional pedals

YAMAHA FC7 foot controller

This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression,

SustainCont, or PitchBend Up/Down.

YAMAHA FC4 foot switch

YAMAHA FC5 foot switch

These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain,

Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, or VibeRotor.

Setting the left pedal function

[LPedal]

Setting the auxiliary pedal

function [AuxPedal]

NO YES

TIP

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 87

Detailed settings for

iAFC [iAFC SETTING]

This section describes how to adjust various iAFC settings, such as selecting the iAFC type and adjusting the

depth. You can also perform an automatic adjustment in order to obtain the optimal iAFC effect.

Procedure

Press [iAFC SETTING] to enter iAFC Setting mode.

•To turn on the iAFC, open the lid with the

longer stay using the inner recess.

When the lid is closed or open with the

shorter stay, the iAFC will not be turned on.

•Perform the automatic adjustment when

you turn on the power of the Clavinova for

the ﬁrst time, and also after you have moved

the Clavinova. (page 88)

See the procedure on page 73.

To understand the character of each iAFC type ...

Listen to the demo song for each iAFC type. (page 34)

Settings:

SpatialEnsEfx (Spatial Ensemble Effect)

This lets you experience the ambience and rever-

beration that are characteristic of performing on

stage. Ambience and reverberation are also

added to the performance of the musicians play-

ing together with you, letting you enjoy the sen-

sation of playing together on stage. The sound of

the instrument itself and the sound of singing

and other instruments played nearby is picked

up by mics, and processed to simulate the spatial

characteristic of performing together on stage.

NaturalSndBrd (Natural Soundboard)

This creates the resonance and enhances the

acoustic realism of the sound that is characteris-

tic of acoustic instruments. When used on a

grand piano sound, it produces a more natural-

sounding piano. The sound of the instrument

itself is picked up by mics, and processed to cre-

ate a virtual soundboard.

DynDmpEfx (Dynamic Damper Effect)

This simulates the sustain sound that occur when

you press the damper pedal of a grand piano.

The mic is not used, but the sound produced

within the Clavinova is processed to create a spa-

cious sensation.

This parameter is effective only on the voice

group “GRANDPIANO1.”

Setting range:

DynDmpEfx GrandPiano,

SemiConcert,

FullConcert

NaturalSndBrd/SpatialEnsEfx Small, Medium,

Large

Normal setting:

DynDmpEfx SemiConcert

NaturalSndBrd/SpatialEnsEfx Medium

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

0–127

Normal setting:

106

[iAFC SETTING]

Selecting the iAFC type

[iAFC Type]

NO YES

Select the iAFC variationSelect the iAFC type

TIP

Adjusting the iAFC depth

[iAFC Depth]

NO YES

Detailed Settings

88 CLP-175

Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING]

To perform the automatic adjustment, open the

lid with the longer stay using the inner recess.

When the lid is closed or open with the shorter

stay, the automatic adjustment will not be per-

formed.

This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and

response of iAFC so that the optimal iAFC effect

will be obtained.

When automatic adjustment begins, a fairly loud

harpsichord note will sound four times at a ﬁxed

interval.

Automatic adjustment will end in approximately

two and a half minutes.

While automatic adjustment is being performed,

do not make audible noises in the vicinity of the

Clavinova.

See the procedure on page 73.

iAFC cannot be used in the following cases:

• When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay.

• When the Speaker setting is Normal, and head-

phones are connected.

• When the Speaker setting is Off.

If you close the lid completely or to the shorter stay while

performing the automatic adjustment, the adjustment will

be aborted.

If this occurs, perform the automatic adjustment once

again.

The keyboard will not produce sound while automatic

adjustment is being performed. Nor is it possible to

adjust the volume of the Clavinova.

If a sound occurs in the vicinity of the Clavinova during

automatic adjustment, the automatic adjustment may be

aborted, and the settings reset to their default values.

If this occurs, we recommend that you perform the auto-

matic adjustment once again.

If any low-range noise (such as an air conditioner or traf-

ﬁc) is audible around the Clavinova during the automatic

adjustment, the adjustment may abort and the settings

reset to their default values. If this occurs, we recom-

mend that you perform the automatic adjustment once

again after you eliminate the noise.

If you re-locate the Clavinova after making the automatic

adjustment, ﬁrst reset the iAFC settings to their default

values before re-locating the unit. (See the following.)

This sets the iAFC function to the default setting.

See the procedure on page 73.

Calibration (automatic adjust-

ment) [Calibration]

TIP

Restoring the default iAFC set-

tings [iAFC Default]

TIP

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 89

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels.

About MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It

enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers.

Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from

a connected MIDI device or computer.

MIDI connectors

MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.

MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.

MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is.

Prepare dedicated MIDI cables.

[TO HOST] jack

Use this jack to connect the Clavinova to a computer.

The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connect-

ing a Personal Computer” on page 63 for more information.

[USB] jack

Use this jack to connect the Clavinova and computer.

MIDI

THRU

HOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

OUTIN

TIP

TO HOSTHOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

TIP

USB

HOST SELECT

MIDI

MacPC-2

USB

TO HOST

MIDI performance data and

commands are transferred in

the form of numeric values.

Since MIDI data that can be

transmitted or received var-

ies depending on the type of

MIDI device, check the “MIDI

Implementation Chart” to ﬁnd

out what MIDI data and com-

mands your devices can

transmit or receive. The Clavi-

nova’s MIDI Implementation

Chart is listed on page 32 in

the “Reference Booklet” for

the CLP-175.

When you are using the

MIDI connectors, set the

[HOST SELECT] switch to

“MIDI.” (See page 61.)

When you are using the [TO

HOST] jack, set the [HOST

SELECT] switch correctly,

according to the type of

computer you are using.

(See page 61.)

When you are using the

[USB] jack, set the [HOST

SELECT] switch to “USB.”

You can also obtain detailed

information about MIDI from

various music magazines

and books.

TIP

NOTE

TIP

Detailed Settings

90 CLP-175

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

Procedure

Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode.

This parameter enables you to specify the channel

on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting for:

Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.)

Normal setting:

Main — Ch1

Left — Ch2

Layer — Ch3

Left Layer— Ch4

You can specify whether each channel of data from

MIDI [IN], [TO HOST], and [USB] will be

received.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting for:

Ch1 - Ch32

Setting range:

Song, Main, Left, Layer, LeftLayer, Keyboard, Off

Normal setting:

Ch1–16 — Song

Ch17 — Keyboard

Ch18 — Main

Ch19 — Left

Ch20 — Layer

Ch21 — LeftLayer

Others — Off

[MIDI SETTING]

Setting the MIDI transmit

channel [MidiOutChannel]

Select a voice part.

Specify the channel.

NO YES

Setting the MIDI receive chan-

nel [MidiInChannel]

Select a channel. Select a MIDI

receive part.

NO YES

MIDI IN

TO HOST

Sound source A

Channels 1-16

Port A Port B

Sound source B

Channels 17-32

MIDI data

Used for song

playback

Only for song

playback

(When the channel

setting is other

than Song or Off)

Played from

the keyboard

USB

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 91

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

“Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavi-

nova produces the sound from its tone generator

when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control

Off” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are

cut off from each other. This means that even if

you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not pro-

duce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be

transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device,

which can produce the sound. The “Local Control

Off” setting is useful when you wish to play an

external sound source while playing the keys on the

Clavinova.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

You can select whether your performance data or

song playback data (including demo songs) is sent

via MIDI.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Keyboard performance data played on the key-

board

Song song playback data

Normal setting:

Keyboard

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI

data the Clavinova can receive.

See the procedure on page 73.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (Sys-

tem Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI

data the Clavinova can transmit.

See the procedure on page 73.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemReal-

Time, SysEx (System Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

Setting Local control on/off

[LocalControl]

Selecting performance from

the keyboard or song data for

MIDI transmission [MidiOutSe-

lect]

NO YES

Selecting a type of data

received via MIDI [ReceivePa-

rameter]

Selecting a type of data trans-

mitted via MIDI [TransmitPa-

rameter]

Select a type of data.

Select On or Off.

NO YES

Select a type of data.

Select On or Off.

NO YES

Detailed Settings

92 CLP-175

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

You can transmit the panel data, such as voice

selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you

record performance data to a connected sequencer,

it is useful if you ﬁrst send and record (at the

beginning of the performance data) the panel

setup data for your performance during playback.

See the procedure on page 73.

You can transmit the voice data speciﬁed in the

“Voice Setting” menu (page 79) as MIDI bulk data.

You can interrupt voice data bulk dump transmis-

sion by pressing the B [– (NO)] button.

See the procedure on page 73.

Transmitting the initial set-

tings on the panel [Ini-

tialSetup]

Executing voice data bulk

dump [VoiceBulkDump]

NO YES

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 93

Other settings

You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc.

Procedure

Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode.

You can specify a touch response (how the sound

responds to the way you play the keys).

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Light With a soft touch, the Clavinova pro-

duces a loud sound. The volume level of

tones tends to be consistent.

Medium Standard touch response.

HeavyYou must hit the key very hard to gener-

ate a loud volume. This allows for versa-

tile expression, from pianissimo to

fortissimo tones.

Fixed No touch response. The volume level will

be the same regardless of how hard you

play the keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons

to set the volume level.

Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level:

1 - 127

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instru-

ment. This function is useful when you play the

Clavinova along with other instruments or CD

music.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps)

You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1”

and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the

tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite

match that of other instruments voices.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Stretch Tuning curve particularly for pianos

Flat Tuning curve in which the frequency is

octave doubled over the entire keyboard

range

[OTHER SETTING]

Selecting a touch response

[TouchResponse]

NO YES

Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]

Selecting a tuning curve for a

piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]

NO YES

Detailed Settings

94 CLP-175

Other settings

You can select various scales.

Equal Temperament is the most common contem-

porary piano tuning scale. However, history has

known numerous other scales, many of which

serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You

can experience the tunings of these genres.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Equal

One octave is divided into twelve equal

intervals. Currently most popular piano

tuning scale.

PureMajor/PureMinor

Based on natural overtones, three major

chords using these scales produce a beauti-

ful, pure sound. They are sometimes used

for chorus parts.

Pythagorean

This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek

philosopher, is based on the interval of a

perfect 5th. The 3rd produces swells, but

the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable

for some leads.

MeanTone

This scale is an improvement of the

Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has

been eliminated. It spread during the late

16th century through the late 18th century.

Handel used this scale.

WerckMe ister/KirnBerger

These scales combine Mean Tone and

Pythagorean in different ways. With these

scales, modulation changes the impression

and feel of the songs. They were often used

in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are

also often used now to reproduce the music

of that era on harpsichords.

Normal setting:

Equal

If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to

specify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons.

Setting range:

C, C



, D, E



, E, F, F



, G, A



, A, B



, B

You can specify the split point (the boundary between

the right-hand and left-hand keyboard areas).

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

A-1–C7

You can also use [SPLIT] to set the split point. (page 38)

TRANSPOSE= To change the key

(Changing the key: To raise or lower the overall pitch of

the entire song.)

The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to

shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semi-

tone intervals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key signa-

tures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the

keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments.

For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,”

playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play

the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will

transpose it to the key of F.

Setting for:

Master The sound of the entire instrument

(the manually-played sound and the

song playback)

Keyboard The manually-played sound

Song The song playback

Selecting a scale [Scale]

NO YES

Specifying the Split Point

[SplitPoint]

Changing the key [Transpose]

NO YES

NOTE

TIP

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 95

Other settings

Setting range:

–12 (–1 octave)–0 (normal pitch)–+12 (+1 octave)

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

1–10

This parameter is effective on the voices, such as

“Grand Piano 1.”

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Off, 1 - 10

This parameter is effective only on the voice group

“GRANDPIANO1.”

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Off, 1 - 10

You can adjust the volume of the key-off sound (the

subtle sound that occurs when you release a key)

This is effective on the voice groups “Grand

Piano1,” “Harpsichord,” and “E.Clavichord” and

on the voice “E.Piano2.”

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Off, 1 - 10

This parameter enables you to select whether the

sound is sustained while you press the keys on the

keyboard (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained

only while you press and hold down the sustain

pedal, like playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”).

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

PianoLike, Normal

Normal setting:

PianoLike

Adjusting the depth of the

Soft pedal [SoftPedalDepth]

Depth of string resonance

[StringResonanceDepth]

Depth of sustain sampling for

the damper pedal [Sustain-

SamplingDepth]

NO YES

Specify the volume of the key-

off sound [KeyOffSam-

plingDepth]

Selecting a pedal function for

vibraphone [VibraphonePed-

alMode]

NO YES

Detailed Settings

96 CLP-175

Other settings

If you assign the SONG START/STOP function to a

pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function

assigned to the pedal in the Voice Setting menu (pages

85 and 86) is disabled.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting for:

Left, Middle, AUX

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

Off for all pedals

A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector

may switch on and off differently. For example,

some pedals turn on the effects and others turn

them off when you press them.

Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

Make, Break

Here you can specify the point to which you must

depress the pedal (right, center, left, AUX) before the

assigned effect begins to be applied. (This setting

applies to effects that can be assigned to each pedal,

such as damper or sostenuto (page 85). Expression is

not affected by this setting.)

If the effect is an on/off type effect, this setting

speciﬁes the point at which the effect will be

switched on/off.

Setting range:

–2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2

(effective with the deepest press)

This speciﬁes the amount of change that can be

produced by the pitch bend function which

smoothly varies the pitch.

•This setting applies only to the manually-played

sound.

•This setting can be made in semitone steps.

•You can set the pedal function (page 85) to spec-

ify whether the pitch will be raised or lowered.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting range:

0–+12 (Pressing the pedal will raise/lower the pitch

by 12 semitones [1 octave])

Normal setting:

Assign the SONG [START/

STOP] function to the pedal

[PedalStart/Stop]

Selecting a type of auxiliary

pedal [AuxPedalType]

TIP

Select a pedal to assign

the function.

Set to On or Off.

NO YES

Setting the point at which the

damper pedal starts to affect

the sound [HalfPedalPoint]

Pitch bend range

[PitchBendRange]

NO YES

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 97

Other settings

This setting lets you switch the speaker on/off.

See the procedure on page 73.

Normal (HeadphoneSW)

The speaker will sound only if head-

phones are not connected.

On The speaker will always sound.

Off The speaker will not sound.

You can back up some settings, such as voice selec-

tion and metronome setting, so that they will not

be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavi-

nova.

•Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s mem-

ory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter

setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter

setting (page 56) are always backed up.

See the procedure on page 73.

Setting for:

Tr anspose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, iAfcOnOff,

SplitPoint, Main/LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting,

SongSetting, iAfcSetting, MidiSetting, and Other-

Setting (except for Transpose and SplitPoint set-

ting).

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, MetronomeSet-

ting, and OtherSetting (except for Transpose and

SplitPoint setting) parameters are set to Off. Other

parameters are set to On.

You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory

default) settings.

•The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File

menu does not change.

•The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/

Off) (left column) is reset to the normal setting.

•You can specify whether the memory songs are

erased or kept.

See the procedure on page 73.

Selecting for “MemorySong”:

MemorySongExcluded Memory songs are kept.

MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are

erased.

Press and hold down the white key on the right end

(C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the

power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory

songs saved in the storage memory are not erased.

If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time,

press and hold down the right-most white key (C7)

and black key (B



6) and press the [POWER] switch

to turn on the power to the Clavinova.

Switch the speaker on/off

[Speaker]

Selecting items saved at shut-

down [MemoryBackUp]

Select the desired item. Select on or off.

NO YES

Restoring the normal (default)

settings [FactorySet]

Other method for restoring

the normal settings

Reset the Clavinova.

Select a value for memory songs.

NO YES

POWER

VARIATION

BRIGHTMELLOW

BRILLIANCE

E.PIANO

STRINGS

E.PIANO

CHOIR

SPLIT

CHORUS ON

OFFREVERB

HARPSI-

CHORD

SYNTH.

PAD

VIBRA-

PHONE

VOICE

SETTING

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

AFC

SETTING

AFC

E.BASS XG

GUITAR

E.CLAVI-

CHORD

WOOD

BASS

VOICE

EFFECT

[POWER]

B 6

Detailed Settings

98 CLP-175

Message List

The messages are listed in alphabetical order.

Message Meaning

This will be displayed following the “BulkDataReceiving Voice” mes-

sage. This indicates that the Clavinova ﬁnished receiving the bulk data.

Once you have veriﬁed this message, you may proceed to the next step.

Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try

again.

The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this mes-

sage is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to

the next step.

This message will appear if a sound is audible in the vicinity of the

Clavinova during automatic adjustment. The automatic adjustment

may abort, and the settings reset to their default values. In this case,

perform the automatic adjustment once again.

This message means that when the “Speaker” setting is set to Normal

and headphones are connected, no sound is output from the speaker

on the bottom face, and therefore automatic adjustment of iAFC is

not possible. In this case, unplug the headphones.

This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possi-

ble because the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay.

In this case, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess.

This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possi-

ble because no sound is output from the speaker on the bottom face.

In this case if the “Speaker” setting is Off, turn “Speaker” On. If

“Speaker” is set to Normal and headphones are connected, unplug

the headphones.

This message conﬁrms that in the “VoiceBulkDump” operation

(page 92), you pressed the B [–(NO)] button to cancel while data

was being transmitted.

This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The

Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the

next step.

When you delete a folder, this message asks you whether you want to

delete all of the ﬁles in that folder. To delete all ﬁles in the folder,

press the D [+(YES)] button. To cancel, press the D [–(NO)] button.

Writing or reading data from the disk has failed. Try again. If you

still see this message, the disk may be damaged or the disk drive may

have malfunction. If you see this message while using a brand new

disk, it is more likely that the disk drive is malfunctioning. Ask your

Yamaha dealer for repair.

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 99

Message List

Message Meaning

The ﬂoppy disk space is full and can no longer record data. Use a

new disk (page 50) or delete unnecessary ﬁles from the disk

(page 51) to make room for new data.

You attempted to eject a ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive while the

drive was writing or reading. The writing or reading operation is not

complete yet. Try it again.

When you attempted to rename a song and save it in “RenameSong”

(page 53), this message will appear if an identically-named song

already exists in the save memory / ﬂoppy disk that contains that

song. Three seconds after this message is displayed, you will return

to the previous screen. Please specify a different name.

This message prompts you to execute a ﬁle-related operation. Press

the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to

cancel.

The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the mes-

sage disappears, then proceed to the next step.

The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song

setting) (“FactorySet” on page 97) have been restored. This message

also appears if you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the

power to the Clavinova (page 97).

The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song

setting) (“FactorySet” on page 97) have been restored. This message

also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and B



6 keys and

turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 97).

The Clavinova’s ﬂash memory (storage memory) has expired. Con-

sult your Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will

not back up the songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] but-

ton to return to the previous screen.

There is a problem with the TO HOST/USB connector

When using the CLP-175 connected to your personal computer ...

The driver or MIDI application on your computer is not functioning cor-

rectly, perhaps because the computer is turned off, the cable is not con-

nected correctly, or the HOST SELECT switch is not set correctly. In this

case, turn off the power of the CLP-175 and your computer, and check the

cable connections and HOST SELECT switch setting. Then turn on the

power in the order of your computer → CLP-175, and check that the driver

and MIDI application on your computer are functioning correctly.

When using the CLP-175 by itself ...

This message may appear if a cable is left connected to the [TO HOST] or

[USB] jack of the CLP-175. In this case, turn off the power of the CLP-175,

disconnect the cable, and then turn on the power again. If the cable is left

connected, the CLP-175 may not function correctly.

Detailed Settings

100 CLP-175

Message List

Message Meaning

In the CopyDisk operation (page 54), the copy source disk has not

been inserted to the disk drive. Insert the disk.

In the CopyDisk operation (page 54), the copy destination disk has

not been inserted into the disk drive. Insert the disk.

You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a

song to storage memory. This message appears next time you turn

on the power. The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage mem-

ory can be recovered.

This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIlle-

galMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered

data in the storage memory as much as possible.

This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIlle-

galMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not

recover data in the storage memory and that all memory songs were

deleted.

While a preset song was being read, the Clavinova detected defects in

memory. Reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings

with “MemorySongIncluded” (page 97) after you back up all song

data.

This message indicates that there may be a problem with the mem-

ory. If the message appears repeatedly when you continue using the

Clavinova, back up the song data, then restore the default setting by

using “FactorySet” with “MemorySongIncluded” selected (page 97).

There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any

more songs. Save songs to a ﬂoppy disk (page 54) or delete some

songs in the storage memory, then save new data to memory.

A ﬂoppy disk has not been inserted into the disk drive for a disk-

related operation. Insert the disk and continue.

This message will appear if there is no song for the “SaveToMemory”

(page 50) or “SaveToDisk” (page 51) operation to save. In this case,

no song will be saved.

You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory

or on disk. You cannot delete the song.

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 101

Message List

Message Meaning

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite

the existing data with new data when you add recordings to a

song. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the

[– (NO)] button to cancel.

You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right

after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears.

1. You tried to write, copy, or delete data on a disk that has its “write

protect” tab on, or a disk that is internally protected against writ-

ing. Set the protect tab to off (unprotected) (page 13) and try

again. If you still see this message, the disk is internally protected

(such as commercially available music data). You cannot write or

copy to such a disk.

2. This message also appears when you try to copy data on an inter-

nally-protected disk onto another disk using the CopyDisk func-

tion (page 54). You cannot duplicate such a disk.

You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected ﬁles (such as

commercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or

delete such ﬁles.

After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s

Current memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a

ﬂoppy disk. You cannot save such a song to another disk. You cannot

write or copy to such a disk.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the

edited settings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings.

Press the [EXIT] button to cancel.

You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded

song to storage memory or a ﬂoppy disk. If you continue the opera-

tion, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording,

press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+

(YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “SaveToMemory”

(page 50) or “SaveToDisk” (page 51) parameter screen. If necessary,

select “SaveToMemory” or “SaveToDisk” accordingly and save the

recorded song, then proceed to another operation.

Detailed Settings

102 CLP-175

Message List

Message Meaning

1. This message will appear if a problem is found with the song data

when you select a song or while the song is playing. In this case, re-

select the song, and try once again to play it back. If the message

still appears, the song data may have been damaged.

2. This message will appear if a different “CharacterCode” (page 56)

is selected than when you assigned the song name. In this case,

switch the “CharacterCode”, re-select the song, and play back.

1. This message will be displayed if current memory ﬁlls up during

recording. Recording will stop automatically at this point. The

data that had been recorded up to that point will remain. This

message will also be displayed when you attempt to enter Record

mode for additional recording if that song already occupies all of

current memory. In this case, additional recording will not be pos-

sible. If there is an already-recorded track that you do not need to

keep, you can use “ChannelClear” (page 76) to delete the

unneeded track, so that you will then be able to record the equiva-

lent amount of additional material.

2. This message will be displayed when you select a song if that song

is larger than the capacity of the current memory (page 104). This

song cannot be loaded into the CLP-175, and cannot be played

back. Please select a different song.

This message will be displayed when you edit a song if that song is

larger than the capacity of the current memory (page 104). This

song cannot be edited on the CLP-175.

This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the

B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.

This message prompts you to conﬁrm the execution. Press the

[+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to can-

cel.

You tried to perform a ﬁle- or disk-related operation using an unfor-

matted disk. Eject the disk, format it using the “FormatDisk” param-

eter (page 55), and try again.

You tried to perform a ﬁle- or disk-related operation using an unfor-

matted disk. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button.

To format the disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] button to

display the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 55).

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 103

Message List

Message Meaning

This message means that the Clavinova was unable to transmit voice

bulk data. If this message appears, make sure that the power of your

computer is not turned off, that the cable is connected correctly, that

the HOST SELECT switch is set correctly, and that the driver on

your computer is functioning correctly. Then try transmitting the

data once again.

You tried to copy data to a different type of disk (e.x.: 2DD

→2HD,

2HD

→2DD) during the CopyDisk operation (page 54). Eject the

disk and insert an appropriate disk.

You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you

tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters)

not supported by the CLP-175, and the CLP-175 could not process

the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three sec-

onds. Rename the song correctly.

Detailed Settings

104 CLP-175

Questions about Operations

and Functions

■ The buttons do not respond.

While you are using a function, some buttons

not used for the function are disabled. If the

song is playing, stop the playback. Otherwise,

press the [EXIT] button to return to the main

screen. Then, perform the desired operation.

■

The sound sustains and does not decay

when I press the sostenuto pedal.

With the voices in the CHURCH ORGAN,

JAZZ ORGAN, STRINGS, CHOIR group, or

some voices in the XG group, the sound contin-

ues sustaining while you are holding down the

sostenuto pedal.

■

Higher or lower notes does not sound cor-

rectly when the transpose or octave setting

is made.

The setting range for the transposition and

octave setting is C-2 - G8. (With the normal set-

ting, the Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of

A-1 - C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower

than C-2, it will produce a sound one octave

higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher

than G8, it will produce a sound one octave

lower.

■

How can I return to the recording or song

select screen during song recording or play-

back?

Press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] and

[] buttons once.

■

The tempo does not change even though I

recorded with tempo changes.

Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the

changed tempo may not be recorded. In this

case, the recording will be played back at the

original tempo.

Make tempo changes when the recording track

is selected and a red track indicator is ﬂashing.

The same trick applies to editing the tempo

after recording.

■

Performance in Dual or Split mode is not

recorded.

Track data is lost unexpectedly.

For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording

track for the second voice (that is, the voice for

the left-hand part) is automatically assigned

(page 35). Therefore, if the track already has

data, the data will be overwritten during

recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or

Split mode in the middle of the song is not

recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with

the second voice (or the notes lower than the

Split point) are not recorded.

■

What type of data is recorded?

Data recorded in the tracks:

•Note data (notes you play)

•Voice selection

•Clavinova pedals and external pedal on/off

•Reverb depth [ReverbSend]

•Chorus depth [ChorusSend]

• DSP effect depth [DSPDepth]

•Sound brightness [Brightness]

•Resonance effect setting [Harmonic Content]

•Equalizer’s low-range frequency setting

[EQLowFreq.]

•Equalizer’s low-range gain setting [EQLowGain]

•Equalizer’s high-range frequency setting

[EQHighFreq.]

•Equalizer’s high-range gain setting [EQHigh-

Gain]

•Octave setting of the voice [Octave]

•Volume setting of each voice [Volume]

•Left/right position of each sound [Pan]

• Fine pitch adjustment between two voices

(Dual only) [Detune]

•Volume change in response to playing

strength for each voice [TouchSense]

Data recorded globally in all tracks:

•Tempo

•Time signature

•Reverb type

•Chorus type

• DSP effect type

Yo u can change all data except for note data after

recording.

Yo u can change the time signature at the beginning of

the song, or at a position in the song to which you

move, by using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song

is stopped.

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 105

Questions about Operations and Functions

■ I cannot change the key signature in the

song after recording.

Press the [TOP] button to locate the top of the

song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the

measure in which you wish to change the key

signature, then change it.

■

How much data can I record?

•Current memory (page 50): About 800KB

•Storage memory (page 50): About 750KB

• 2DD ﬂoppy disk (page 12): about 720KB

• 2HD ﬂoppy disk (page 12): about 1.4MB

■

The on/off setting of the pedal connected to

the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed.

Some types of pedals may turn on and off in

opposite fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType”

parameter (page 86) in the “OTHER SET-

TING” menu to change the external pedal set-

ting.

■

The song title is not correct.

The “CharacterCode” setting may be different

than that used when you named the song. Also,

if the song was recorded on another instru-

ment, the title might be displayed incorrectly.

Use the “CharacterCode” parameter (page 56)

in the FILE menu to change the setting. How-

ever, if the song was recorded on another

instrument, changing the “CharacterCode”

parameter setting may not resolve the problem.

■

What is the difference between “Touch-

Sense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data?

“TouchSense” determines the manner and

degree to which the volume level changes in

response to your touch on the keyboard. The

MIDI note-on velocity data is not changed. It

changes the volume level at the same velocity

data.

“TouchResponse” determines the touch sensi-

tivity of an instrument. The MIDI note-on

velocity data is changed when you play the key-

board with a consistent touch.

106 CLP-175

MEMO

Detailed Settings

CLP-175 107

Appendix

108 CLP-175

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

The power of the Clavinova does

not turn on.

The power cable is not plugged in

(check at the Clavinova and at the

electrical outlet).

Insert the power cable plug ﬁrmly

into the Clavinova and into the elec-

trical outlet of the correct voltage.

(page 18)

There is a clicking noise when you

press [POWER] to turn the power

on or off.

This is caused by the electrical

power within the instrument.

This is not a malfunction.

Noise is heard from the Clavinova.

A portable telephone is being used

near the Clavinova (or the ring tone

is sounding).

Turn off the power of the portable

telephone located near the Clavi-

nova. Noise may be heard if a por-

table telephone is used near the

Clavinova or if the ring tone occurs.

The overall volume is too low. Or,

there is no sound at all.

The [MASTER VOLUME] is low-

ered.

Raise [MASTER VOLUME].

(page 19)

Headphones are connected (only if

the Speaker setting is “Normal

HeadphoneSW”). (page 97)

Disconnect the headphone plug.

Speaker setting is off.

Set [Speaker] to “Normal” or “ON”.

(page 97)

Local Control is turned off. Set Local control ON. (page 91)

“Expression” is assigned to one of

the right, center, and left pedals.

Assign any function other than

“Expression” to the pedal.

The keyboard volume is lower than

the song playback volume.

The volume level for the keyboard

performance is set too low.

Move [SONG BALANCE] toward

the keyboard to increase the key-

board volume.

Sound is still heard from the speak-

ers even though headphones are

plugged in.

Speaker setting is On.

Set the speaker setting to “Normal

(HeadphoneSW)”. (page 97)

iAFC cannot be turned ON.

The lid is closed or open with the

shorter stay.

Open the lid with the longer stay

using the inner recess.

Feedback occurs when you turn

iAFC on.

iAFC was not automatically

adjusted correctly.

Turn iAFC OFF, and perform the

automatic adjustment. (page 88)

Damper pedal does not function, or

notes are sustained even though

the damper pedal is not pressed.

The plug of the pedal cable is not

inserted into the [PEDAL] jack.

Plug the pedal cable ﬁrmly into the

[PEDAL] jack. (page 115)

CLP-175 109

Appendix

Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the

data recorded by CLP-175, and whether or not the CLP-175 can playback commercially available song data or song

data created for other instruments or on a computer.

Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem,

or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems

playing back data, please refer to the information below.

Basic Check Points

The data and the MIDI device must match in regards

to the items below.

•Disk Format

• Sequence format

•Voice allocation format

Disk format

Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data

used with various devices, including computers. Dif-

ferent devices have different systems of saving data,

therefore it is necessary to ﬁrst conﬁgure the ﬂoppy

disk to the system of the device being used. This opera-

tion is called “formatting.”

•There are two types of ﬂoppy disks: MF2DD (dou-

ble sided, double density) and MF2HD (double

sided, high density), and each type has different for-

matting systems.

• CLP-175 can record and playback with both types of

ﬂoppy disks.

•When formatted by the CLP-175, a 2DD disk saves

up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk saves up to

1.44 MB (megabytes). (The ﬁgures “720 KB” and

“1.44 MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They

are also used to indicate the format type of disk.)

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to

be used is compatible with the format of the disk.

Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence

format.”

• Playback is only possible when the sequence format

of the disk matches that of the MIDI device.

[Common Sequence Formats]

■

SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

• Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one

of two types: Format 0 or Format 1.

•Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format

0, and most commercially available software is

recorded as Format 0.

•The CLP-175 is compatible with both Format 0

and Format 1.

•Performance data recorded on the CLP-175 is

saved in the SMF format 0 in a ﬂoppy disk.

■

ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova

series instruments. This is a common format used

with various Yamaha software.

•The CLP-175 is compatible with ESEQ.

110 CLP-175

Appendix

Data Compatibility

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

•Voices may not play back as expected unless the

voice allocation format of the song data matches

that of the compatible MIDI device used for play-

back.

[Main Voice Allocation Formats]

■

GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation

formats.

•Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM Sys-

tem Level 1, as is most commercially available

software.

•The CLP-175 is compatible with GM System

Level 1.

■

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level

1 format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally

to provide more voices and variations, as well as

greater expressive control over voices and effects,

and to ensure compatibility of data well into the

future.

•The CLP-175 is compatible with XG.

•Performance data recorded with preset voices on

the CLP-175 can be played on other XG-compati-

ble instruments.

■

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection)

This voice allocation format is compatible with

many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the

Clavinova series instruments.

This is also common format used with various

Yamaha software.

The CLP-175 is compatible with DOC.

•Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the

conditions above, the data may still not be com-

pletely compatible, depending on the speciﬁca-

tions of the devices and particular data recording

methods.

CLP-175 111

Appendix

Preset Voice List

: YES, ×: No

Voice

group

Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

GRAND

PIANO1

GrandPiano1

This sound was sampled from a full concert grand

piano. Three stages of dynamics were sampled,

and no effort has been spared in making the sound

virtually identical to that of an acoustic piano. Even

the tonal changes produced by the damper pedal

and the subtle sounds of releasing a key are repro-

duced. The sympathetic vibration (string reso-

nance) that occurs between the strings of an

acoustic piano has also been simulated. Suitable

not only for classical compositions but also for piano

pieces of any style.

MellowPiano

A warm and mellow piano sound. Ideal for classical

music.

RockPiano

A bright-sounding piano. Ideal for rock styles.

HonkyTonk

Piano

A honky-tonk style piano. Enjoy a tonal character

that is quite different than a grand piano.

GRAND

PIANO2

GrandPiano2

×××

A spacious and clear piano sound with a bright res-

onance. Ideal for popular music.

BrightPiano

×××

A spacious and bright piano sound. Ideal for popu-

lar and rock music.

E.PIANO1

E.Piano1

×××

An electronic piano sound produced by an FM syn-

thesizer. The tone will change as you vary your

playing touch. Ideal for popular music.

SynthPiano

× ×××

This voice simulates the electric piano sound pro-

duced by synthesizers in popular music. It also

goes well with the acoustic piano sound.

E.PIANO2

E.Piano2

××

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-

struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly,

and an aggressive tone when played hard.

Vintage

E.Piano

×××

A different type of electric piano sound. Widely used

in rock and popular music.

HARPSI

CHORD

Harpsichord

×× ×

The sound of the instrument frequently used in

baroque music. Variations in playing touch will not

affect the volume, and a characteristic sound will be

heard when you release the key.

Harpsichord

8'+4'

×× ×

A harpsichord with an added upper octave. Pro-

duces a more brilliant sound.

E.CLAVI

CHORD

E.Clavichord

×××

This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound

by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This

funky sound is popular in black contemporary music.

Because of its unique structure, the instrument pro-

duces a peculiar sound when you release the keys.

Wah Clavi.

×××

A distinctive effect is preset.

VIBRA-

PHONE

Vibraphone

××

Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The

tone becomes more metallic the harder you play.

Marimba

×××

A marimba sound, sampled in stereo for spacious-

ness and realism.

Celesta

××

The sound of a celesta (a percussion instrument in

which hammers strike metallic bars to produce

sound). This instrument is well-known for its

appearance in “Dance of the Sugar-plum Fairies”

from Tchaikovsky’s “Nutcracker Suite.”

112 CLP-175

Appendix

Preset Voice List

Voice group Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

GUITAR

NylonGuitar

××

A warm and natural nylon-string guitar sound.

Enjoy playing quiet tunes with this realistic

stereo-sampled sound. Playing the keyboard

strongly will sound a harmonic, producing an

even more guitar-like impression.

SteelGuitar

× ×××

A bright steel guitar sound. Ideal for popular

music.

CHURCH

ORGAN

PipeOrgan

Principal

××××

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument)

organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.

PipeOrgan

Tutti

××××

This voice features a full coupler of a pipe

organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta

and Fugue by Bach.

PipeOrgan

Flute1

××××

A pipe organ sound that combines ﬂute-type

(woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8'

+ 4'). This is a gentle sound that is ideal for

accompanying hymns.

PipeOrgan

Flute2

××××

A pipe organ sound that combines ﬂute-type

(woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8'

+ 4' + 1-1/3'). This is brighter than

PipeOrganFlute1, and is suitable for solos.

JAZZORGAN

JazzOrgan

×××××

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric

organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.

RotaryOrgan

×××××

A bright electric organ sound.

MellowOrgan

×××××

A mellow electric organ sound. Ideal for

calmer songs.

STRINGS

Strings

×××

Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble

with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice

with piano in the Dual mode.

SynthStrings

× ×××

A bright and spacious strings sound. Suitable

for sustained parts in the background of an

ensemble.

SlowStrings

×××

The sound of a string ensemble, with a slow

attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with

GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO.

CHOIR

Choir

× ×××

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creat-

ing rich harmonies in slow pieces.

SlowChoir

× ×××

The sound of a choir with a slow attack. Suit-

able for use in Dual mode with GRAND

PIANO or E.PIANO.

Scat

×××

You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice.

Depending on how hard and what note range

you play, different sounds will be produced.

SYNTH.PAD

SynthPad1

× ×××

A warm, mellow, and spacious synth sound.

Ideal for sustained parts in the background of

an ensemble.

SynthPad2

× ×××

A clear and spacious synth sound. Ideal for

sustained parts in the background of an

ensemble.

WOOD BASS

WoodBass

× ×××

The sound of a ﬁnger-plucked upright bass.

Frequently used in jazz and Latin music.

Bass&Cymbal

× ×××

The sound of a cymbal has been layered onto

the bass. Effective when used for jazz walk-

ing-bass lines.

E.BASS

ElectricBass

× ×××

The sound of an electric bass. Frequently

used in jazz, rock, and popular music.

FretlessBass

× ×××

The sound of a fretless bass. Suitable for

styles such as jazz and fusion.

CLP-175 113

Appendix

Voice Combination Examples

(Dual and Split)

Dual

Split

Dual + Split

MAIN + MAIN

GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1

GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2

This combination is often used in popular music.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2

This combination sounds as if you are playing

two notes that are one octave apart. It is suitable

for the accompaniment of Salsa music.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir This is suitable for romantic ballads.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + E.Clavichord

This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul

music.

MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings

This combination is very suitable for Baroque

music.

MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs

This combination adds strings and bell sound. A

delay effect is automatically applied.

MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano1 / WoodBass

or Bass&Cymbal

This is recommended for light Jazz music. The

damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned

to the right-hand range.

MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir

This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute

song.

MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1

Play these voices elegantly along with piano

arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords

would be more effective.

MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass

This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz

chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding

a variety of expressions.

MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat

Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create

an interesting sound.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano1 + SynthString /

GrandPiano1

This combination creates the thick sound of a

layered piano and strings.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 /

ElectricBass

This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb

and chorus (page 81) will improve the groove.

The damper pedal is effective on the voice

assigned to the right-hand range.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT

Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings /

Harpsichord8' + Strings

This combination makes a very brilliant sound.

114 CLP-175

Appendix

Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

•Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install

all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble

in accordance with the sequence given below.

•Assembly should be carried out by at least two per-

sons.

•Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated

below. Use of incorrect screws can damage the

stand.

•Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing the

assembly of each unit.

•To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given

below.

The CLP-175 features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field

Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker

located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the

reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open

the lid with the longer stay (page 17).

In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the fol-

lowing:

•Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the

power of the Clavinova for the ﬁrst time, and after each

time you re-locate the Clavinova. (page 88)

• Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the

Clavinova.

1. Remove all parts from the box. Con-

ﬁrm that all parts shown in the illus-

tration are included.

Main unit

How to position the main unit

Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the ﬂoor.

Place the unit on the cloth with the key cover closed

and the keyboard side on the bottom and lean the unit

against the wall so that the unit will not fall or slip.

Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the instru-

ment and the wall from scratches.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

TIP

Lean the unit against the

wall as shown at right.

Legs Pedal box

6 × 25 mm ﬁxing screws × 16

AC power cord

Cord holder

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom.

CAUTION

Do not place the main unit with

the rear side facing down.

CAUTION

Do not lay the main unit upside

down on the ﬂoor.

CAUTION

Do not position the main unit so

that its bottom is in contact with

ﬂoor.

CLP-175 115

Appendix

Keyboard Stand Assembly

2. Attach two front legs and a rear leg.

Refer to the diagram below to verify the orientation of

the legs.

Install and tighten four screws on each leg, starting

with one of the front legs.

3. Install the pedal box.

1 Remove the twist tie that afﬁxes the pedal

cord to the upper portion of the pedal box.

2 Align the cord with the groove on the unit,

and attach the pedal box using four screws.

3 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal

connector. Insert the plug so the arrow side

faces front (toward the keyboard).

If the plug will not go in easily, do not

force it. Double-check the orientation of

the plug, then try again.

4 Attach the cord holder on the unit as shown

in the illustration below, then use the cord

holder to afﬁx the pedal cord.

4. Raising the unit to the standing posi-

tion.

Use the front legs as support to raise the unit.

Rear leg

Front leg Front leg

Twist tie

CAUTION

•Be careful not to pinch your ﬁngers.

•When you raise the unit, do not hold the key

cover.

116 CLP-175

Appendix

Keyboard Stand Assembly

5. Connect the power cord.

6. Set the adjuster.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm contact with

the ﬂoor surface.

After completing the assembly, please check the following.

Left of the rear leg on the bottom of the main unit,

when viewed from front

• Are there any parts left over?

→Review the assembly procedure and correct

any errors.

•Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other mov-

able ﬁxtures?

→Move the Clavinova to an appropriate loca-

tion.

•Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

→Tighten all screws.

•Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

→Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly

against the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted

securely into the sockets?

→Check the connection.

•If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the

assembly diagrams and retighten all screws.

When moving the instrument after assembly,

always hold the bottom of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not hold the key cover or top portion.

Improper handling can result in damage to the

instrument or personal injury.

Top portion

Key cover

CLP-175 117

Appendix

Index

You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words.

The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column.

Numerics

50 greats for the Piano 13

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Practicing a one-hand part 28

Adding variation to the sound ➔ Effect

function 32

Assembly 114

Assigning the START/STOP function

to a pedal 96

AUX IN jacks 62

AUX OUT jacks 62

AUX PEDAL jacks 61

Auxiliary pedal function 86

BackUp 97

Bench 13

BRILLIANCE 32

Center pedal 31

Center pedal function 85

Character Code 56

Characters 56

CHORUS 33

combining two voices ➔ Dual mode

Connection

Audio 62

computer 63

MIDI 66

Other Components 61

Serial 64

Speaker 62

USB 67

Connectors

MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 61, 66

CONTRAST* 19

Damper (right) pedal 31

Data Compatibility 109

Data type 59

Default (Normal) setting* 32

Demonstration tunes 24

Detailed Settings 70

iAFC 87

Metronome 78

MIDI 89

Other settings 93

recording and playback 75

voices 79

Disk

Copy 54

Format 55

SongAutoOpen 56

Disk song 48

Display contrast 19

DOWN (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs 27

metronome 39

Dual

Detailed settings 79

Recording 47

Dual mode ➔ combining two voices

Effect function 32

equalizer 84

EXIT 23

EXTRA TRACKS ➔ the third or more

tracks 45

FactorySet 97

Fast forward 27, 58

FILE* 48

Floppy Disk 12

Formatting a floppy disk 55

Headphone Hanger 19

Headphones 19

HOST SELECT switch 61

iAFC 34

iAFC

iAFC Detailed settings 87

Jacks

AUX IN 62

AUX OUT 62

AUX PEDAL 61

PHONES 19

TO HOST 61, 64

USB 61

LCD ➔ Screen 23

Contrast 19

Left pedal 31

Left pedal function 86

Lid 17

List

Demonstration tunes 24

Detailed Settings 70

Message 98

Preset Voice 111

Maintenance 13

MASTER VOLUME* 19

Memory 48

Memory song 48

MemoryBackUp 97

Message List 98

Metronome 39

Detailed settings 78

METRONOME SETTING 78

MIDI 89

Detailed settings 89

MIDI cables 66

MIDI connectors 63, 66

MIDI driver 64

MIDI SETTING 89

Music braces 16

Music Data 57

118 CLP-175

Appendix

Music rest 16

New Song 40

Normal setting* 32

Other settings 93

Pedal Function

Auxiliary 86

Center 85

Left 86

Right 85

Pedals 31

Personal computer 63

PHONES jacks 19

Playback

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Demo Songs 25

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

Playing back repeatedly (song) 77

Playing back repeatedly (specifying the

range) 76

playing two voices ➔ Split mode 37

POWER 18

Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset

songs) 28

Preset song memory 48

Preset Voice List 111

Recording

Tape Recorder 62

Recording in Dual 47

Recording in Split 47

Recording Your Performance 40

Re-recording 42

REVERB 33

Rewind 27, 58

Right pedal 31

Right pedal function 85

Scale 94

Screen 23

Select

50 piano preset songs 26

Demo Songs 25

Recorded Songs and Music Data 57

Selecting a touch response 93

SETTING

metronome 78

Volume 19

SMF (Standard MIDI File) 109

Soft (left) pedal 31

Song

Data Type 59

Delete 52

Detailed settings 75

Playing back repeatedly 77

Rename 53

Store 48

Store (Floppy disk) 51

Store (Storage memory) 50

SONG [START/STOP]

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

Recording 41

SONG BALANCE 47

SONG SELECT

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Recorded Songs and Music Data 57

Recording 40

SONG SETTING 75

Sostenuto (center) pedal 31

Sound

brilliance 32

expression 32

reverberation 33

spread and spaciousness 33

Soundboard reverb 33

Split

Detailed settings 79

Recording 47

Split mode ➔ playing two voices 37

Split point 38

Splitting the keyboard range and

playing two different voices 37

START/STOP

metronome 39

Storage memory 48

StringResonance 95

SustainSampling 95

Synchro Start

50 preset songs 28

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

TEMPO

50 Piano Preset Songs 27

metronome 39

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

the third or more tracks ➔ EXTRA

TRACKS 45

TO HOST jack 61, 64

TOP

50 Piano Preset Songs 27

Recorded Songs and Music Data 58

Recording 41

TouchResponse 93

Track playback on and off 59

TRACK1/TRACK2

50 Piano Preset Songs 28

Recording 40, 44

Troubleshooting 108

Tune 93

Type of characters 56

Type of data (recorded) 104

UP (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs 27

metronome 39

USB jack 61

Voice group buttons 30, 37

VOICE SETTING 79

Voices* 30

Detailed settings 79

Volume

Balance (SONG BLANCE) 47

Setting 19

XG 110

CLP-175 119

MEMO

120 CLP-175

MEMO

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-

ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your

dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instruc-

tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.

For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the

Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem

persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet

replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-

ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire

size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations

that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for

enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that

unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa,

tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected

when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical

storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualiﬁed service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-

ing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO

NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or

at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory

mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the product

or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are

stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

(polarity)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music

Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada

Musique Ltée.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authoriza-

tion to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-

ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-

tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-

minal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH

WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-

TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE

LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA

PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panamá S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Central Europe,

Branch Nederland

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Belgium

Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,

Belgium

Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France, S.A.

Division Professionnelle

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0661

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[CL] 28

Owner's Manual

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate

on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of

the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the

voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To

change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage

appears next to the pointer on the panel.

Clavinova Web site (English only)

http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

DIC 435

CLP-175

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

2003 Yamaha Corporation

WA67380 30?APZC?.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia

Transcripción de documentos

CLP-175 CLP-175 Owner's Manual Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2003 Yamaha Corporation IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. WA67380 30?APZC?.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia DIC 435 Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 (bottom) Model Serial No. Purchase Date PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. Fire warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. Assembly • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. (1)B-7 1/2 CLP-175 3 Connections Using the bench (If included) • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • Gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument's finish. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data Handling caution • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Current data (see page 48) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy disk/the storage memory (see page 48). Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a floppy disk. Backing up the floppy disk • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks. • Bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use caution. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. 4 (1)B-7 CLP-175 2/2 Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-175. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided. Introduction: Please read this section first. In the “Application Index” section on page 10 and “Features” on page 14, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations. Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 104, or the “Index” on page 117. Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer to this section as necessary. Appendix: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference material. Reference Booklet: XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. • The model CLP-175 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this Owner’s Manual. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Copying of the commercially available software is strictry prohibited except for your personal use. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGALCOPIES. ■ Trademarks • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection,” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site (English only): http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ Yamaha Manual Library: http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ CLP-175 5 Table of contents Introduction.......................................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 3 About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 5 Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 6 Application Index ................................................................................................................................. 10 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk ..................................................................... 12 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 13 Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 13 Features ................................................................................................................................................ 14 Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 16 About the key cover ...................................................................................................................................................... 16 About the music rest ..................................................................................................................................................... 16 About the music braces................................................................................................................................................. 16 About the Lid ................................................................................................................................................................ 17 Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 18 Adjusting the display contrast ...................................................................................................................................... 19 Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 19 Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment ............................................................................................................... 20 Basic Operation .................................................. 21 Panel Controls and Terminals.............................................................................................................. 22 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 24 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 26 Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 26 Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs ....................................................................................................... 28 Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 30 Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 30 Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 31 Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 32 To enhance the acoustic realism of the sound ...[iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control)] ................................ 34 Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 35 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 37 Using the metronome ................................................................................................................................................... 39 Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 40 Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 40 Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 40 Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 42 Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 43 Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 44 Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 45 6 CLP-175 Table of contents Introduction Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 45 Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 45 Changing a voice or tempo after recording ........................................................................................................... 46 Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 47 Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 47 Basic Operation Detailed Settings Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] ...................................................................... 48 Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 48 Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 49 Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 50 Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] .................................................................................. 51 Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong]......................................................... 52 Renaming a song...[RenameSong] ............................................................................................................................... 53 Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] .................................................................................... 54 Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] .................................................................................................................... 55 Automatically open a song when the disk is inserted [FDSongAutoOpen] .............................................................. 56 Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 56 Appendix Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data............................................. 57 Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 57 Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 59 Supported song data type ............................................................................................................................................. 59 Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 61 Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 61 Connecting a personal computer ................................................................................................................................. 63 Detailed Settings ................................................ 69 Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 70 Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 70 Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 73 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 75 Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 75 Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] ...................................... 76 Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 76 Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 76 Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 76 Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] ................................................................... 77 Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 77 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ........................................................ 78 Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 78 Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 78 Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 78 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] .............................................................................. 79 Setting the octave [Octave]........................................................................................................................................... 80 Setting the volume level [Volume] .............................................................................................................................. 80 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan] .................................................................................................. 80 CLP-175 7 Table of contents Make fine adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] .......................................................................... 80 Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] ....................................................................................................................... 81 Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]........................................................................................................................ 81 Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 81 Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend] ...................................................................................................................... 81 Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 82 Selecting the DSP type [DSP Type (DSP)] .................................................................................................................. 82 Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect [VibeRotorSpeed(RotorSpeed)] ................................................ 82 Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off [VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff)] .................................................... 83 Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker [RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed)]............................................................ 83 Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect [DSPDepth] .................................................................................................... 83 Adjusting the brightness of the sound [Brightness].................................................................................................... 83 Adjusting the resonance effect [HarmonicContent (Harmonic)] ............................................................................. 83 Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer [EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq)] .................................................... 84 Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer [EQ LowGain]............................................. 84 Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer [EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq)] ................................................ 84 Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer [EQ HighGain] .......................................... 84 Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense].................................................................................................................. 85 Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 85 Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 85 Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] ....................................................................................................................... 86 Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 86 Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] .......................................................................................... 87 Selecting the iAFC type [iAFC Type] ........................................................................................................................... 87 Adjusting the iAFC depth [iAFC Depth]..................................................................................................................... 87 Calibration (automatic adjustment) [Calibration]..................................................................................................... 88 Restoring the default iAFC settings [iAFC Default].................................................................................................... 88 MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 89 About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 89 Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 90 Setting the MIDI receive channel [MidiInChannel]................................................................................................... 90 Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 91 Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 91 Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 91 Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 91 Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] ...................................................................................... 92 Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 92 Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 93 Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 93 Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 93 Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] ............................................................................... 93 Selecting a scale [Scale] ................................................................................................................................................. 94 Specifying the Split Point [SplitPoint]......................................................................................................................... 94 Changing the key [Transpose] ..................................................................................................................................... 94 Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal [SoftPedalDepth] ............................................................................................ 95 Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 95 Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 95 Specify the volume of the key-off sound [KeyOffSamplingDepth] ........................................................................... 95 Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] ........................................................................ 95 Assign the SONG [START/STOP] function to the pedal [PedalStart/Stop] ............................................................. 96 8 CLP-175 Table of contents Introduction Basic Operation Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 96 Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 96 Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 96 Switch the speaker on/off [Speaker] ............................................................................................................................ 97 Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 97 Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 97 Other method for restoring the normal settings ......................................................................................................... 97 Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 98 Questions about Operations and Functions ...................................................................................... 104 Detailed Settings Appendix .......................................................... 107 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................. 108 Data Compatibility ............................................................................................................................. 109 Appendix Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................. 111 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................. 113 Keyboard Stand Assembly ................................................................................................................. 114 Index................................................................................................................................................... 117 CLP-175 9 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Listening Introduction Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24 “Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26 Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 24 Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Piano” ..............“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 26 Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 40 “Playing back a song” on page 57 Listening to songs in a floppy disk............................................................. “Playing back a song” on page 57 Playing Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 31 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ....................... “Changing the key [Transpose]” on page 94 Changing tonal color Viewing the list of voices ................................................................................ “Preset Voice List” on page 111 Simulating a concert hall........................................................................................... “[REVERB]” on page 33 Combining two voices ..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 35 Playing different sounds with left and right hands ........................... “Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 37 Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 32 Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 33 Making the sound three-dimensional ..............................................................................“[iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control)]” on page 34 Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 28 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 39 Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 40 “Turning track playback on and off ” on page 59 Recording Recording your performance ...................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 40 Saving recorded songs to floppy disks or memory ...........................................................“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 48 10 CLP-175 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Settings Introduction Making detailed settings for recording and playback ............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 75 Making detailed settings for the metronome ......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 78 Making detailed settings for the voices ................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 79 Making detailed settings for MIDI .................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 89 Making detailed settings for the Clavinova .........................................................“Other settings” on page 93 Connecting the Clavinova to other devices What is MIDI?......................................................................................................... “About MIDI” on page 89 Recording your performance ................................. “AUX OUT [R][L] Pin jacks (LEVEL FIXED), [R][L/L+R] Phone jacks” on page 62 Raising the volume .. “AUX OUT [R][L] Pin jacks (LEVEL FIXED), [R][L/L+R] Phone jacks” on page 62 Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova .......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 62 Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 Assembling Assemble/disassemble the Clavinova.............................................“Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 114 Quick solution What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 10 “Features” on page 14 Returning to the main screen................................................................................. “EXIT button” on page 22 Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting ................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 97 Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 98 If you have questions about operations and functions ............................................................................ “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 104 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. “Troubleshooting” on page 108 CLP-175 11 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk Precautions Introduction Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Compatible Disk Type 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. Drive lamp When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that the floppy disk drive is stopped. If the disk drive is operating (during the [SaveToDisk] (P51), [DeleteSong] (P52), [RenameSong] (P53), [CopyDisk] (P54), or [FormatDisk] (P55) operation), the Clavinova displays [Executing]. Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the disk drive is operating. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. Eject button If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. 12 CLP-175 Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks. • Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. About the Floppy Disks • To handle floppy disks with care: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. Handling the Floppy Disk Drive(FDD) and Floppy Disk • Data backup • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Copy Disk function on page 54. Introduction • To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): write-protect tab open (protect position) Maintenance Clean the instrument using a dry or slightly damp soft cloth (wring well). CAUTION Do not use benzene, thinner, detergent, or chemically-treated cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber products on the instrument. Otherwise, the panel or keys may become discolored or degraded. CAUTION Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-4. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. TIP The CLP-175 features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open the lid with the longer stay (page 17). In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the following: • Perform the automatic adjustment after each time you re-locate the Clavinova. (page 88) • Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova. Included Accessories “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection Owner’s Manual Reference Booklet Recording disk Save your recorded performance to this disk. (page 51) Bench (included or optional depending on locale) CLP-175 13 Features Introduction The Yamaha CLP-175 Clavinova features rich sounds produced by Yamaha’s proprietary “AWM dynamic stereo sampling” tone generator system, and a special “Natural Keyboard” that uses wooden keys with an action mechanism for improved continuous key response. The CLP-175 GrandPiano1 voice features 3 velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), “String Resonance” (page 95) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sampling” (page 95)that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Key-off Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-175 comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano. You can output the sound of the Clavinova from an external audio system, or connect it to a cassette tape recorder etc. and record your playing. (page 62) These jacks allow you to connect an external tone generator to reproduce the sound via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. (page 62) This jack can be connected to your computer, allowing you to transfer MIDI data between the Clavinova and the computer. (page 63, 67, 68) LEVEL FIXED R L R L/L+R R L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN PC-2 MIDI IN OUT AUX PEDAL Connect an optional pedal here and assign one of the various functions to the pedal. (page 61) TRACK 1 SONG SONG SELECT KEYBOARD TOP TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE START/STOP REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING THRU MIDI HOST SELECT TO HOST A CONTRAST B YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT USB This jack and selector switch allow direct connection to a personal computer for sequencing and other music applications. (page 63–65) Connect a MIDI device here to use various MIDI functions. (page 61, 66) (About MIDI—page 89) NO DOWN Mac USB EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D VOICE SONG EFFECT POWER PHONES A set of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice. (page 19) Connect the pedal cord here to use the Clavinova’s pedals. (page 115) PEDAL 14 CLP-175 Features [METRONOME] Use the metronome functions. (page 39) [CONTRAST] Adjust the brightness of the display using this control. (page 19) [DEMO] Demonstration playback is available for each voice. (page 24) SONG SELECT [REVERB] / [CHORUS] Add reverb (reverberation) and spread (chorus) to the sound. (page 33) Voice group buttons You can choose from sixteen groups of voices, including grand piano. (page 30) You can also combine two voices and use them together. (page 35) [MASTER VOLUME] Adjust the volume level using this dial. (page 19) SONG [MIDI SETTING] Make detailed MIDI settings, such as MIDI receive/transmit channels. (page 89) [FILE] Save recorded songs and manage song files. (page 48) Introduction The Clavinova includes 50 preset songs. This section enables you to listen to these songs, practice using a convenient practice function, play back Clavinova music data (sold in music stores), and record and play back your performance. (page 26, 40, 57) TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A [SPLIT] You can play different voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard. (page 37) CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG [SONG SETTING] Make detailed settings for song recording and playback. (page 75) [SONG BALANCE] This lets you adjust the volume balance between the song playback and the sound you are playing on the keyboard. (page 47) TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] You can change the song tempo (speed). (page 27, 39, 41, 58) TIP In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the following: • Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and after each time you re-locate the Clavinova. (page 88) • Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova. VOICE The display allows accurate control and operation. (page 23) EFFECT [EXIT] The screen returns to its main display when you press this button. (page 23) [VOICE SETTING] / [VARIATION] You can make detailed settings for tone and effects. (page 79) BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT] Adjust the brightness of the tone using these buttons. (page 32) You can use the iAFC only when you open the lid with the longer stay. (page 17) [iAFC ON/OFF] This enhances the acoustic realism of the sound produced from the Clavinova, similar to the sound of an acoustic instrument. (page 34) [iAFC SETTING] You can select the iAFC type and make other detailed settings for iAFC. (page 87) [OTHER SETTING] This lets you make detailed settings, such as adjusting the keyboard touch or making fine adjustments to the pitch. (page 93) CLP-175 15 Before Using the Clavinova About the key cover Introduction To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. CAUTION Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and the unit. Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. About the music rest To raise the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. 3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. To lower the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). 3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down. About the music braces These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place. To open 16 CLP-175 To close Before Using the Clavinova About the Lid Longer stay Shorter stay NOTE For the longer stay, use the inner recess, and for the shorter stay, use the outer recess to support the lid. To open the lid: 1. Raise and hold the right side of the lid (viewed from the keyboard end of the instrument). 2. Raise the lid stay and carefully lower the lid so that the end of the stay fits into the recess in the lid. Introduction One long stay and one short stay are provided on the lid. Use one of them to open the lid to the desired angle. 1 2 To turn on the iAFC (page 34), open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the iAFC will not be turned on. To close the lid: 1. Hold the lid stay and carefully raise the lid. 2. Hold the lid in its raised position and lower the lid stay. 3. Carefully lower the lid. 1 2 3 CAUTION • Make sure that the end of the stay fits securely in the lid recess. If the stay is not properly seated in the recess, the lid may fall, causing damage or injury. • Be careful that you or others do not bump the stay while the lid is raised. The stay may be bumped out of the lid recess causing the lid to fall. • Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children's) when raising or lowering the lid. CLP-175 17 Before Using the Clavinova Turning the power on Introduction 1. Connect the power cable. First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1 2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) WARNING! Make sure your CLP-175 is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-175. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-175 may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the CLP-175. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova. Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. • The screen located in the center of the front panel lights up. The drive lamp below the lower right end of the keyboard also lights. TIP If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the drive lamp remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. [POWER] The drive lamp lights. A B NO C YES D When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name appears on the screen. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova. • The screen and the drive lamp turn off. 18 CLP-175 Before Using the Clavinova Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD. A CONTRAST B Use this knob. NO YES EXIT C D TERMINOLOGY CONTRAST: difference between brightness and darkness Introduction Setting the volume To adjust the volume, use the [MASTER VOLUME] located at the left of the panel. Play the keyboard to actually produce sound while you adjust the volume. The level decreases. MIN The level increases. CAUTION Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. MAX MASTER VOLUME TERMINOLOGY MASTER VOLUME: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound TIP You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level, the AUX IN input level and the AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] output level using the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. Using headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES] jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) CAUTION Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss. PHONES TIP Optional headphones HPE-160 Yamaha headphones. Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the CLP-175 package so that you can hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 × 10mm) as shown in the figure. CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise, the Clavinova or the hanger may be damaged. CLP-175 19 Before Using the Clavinova Performing the iAFC automatic adjustment Introduction The CLP-175 features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open the lid with the longer stay. (page 17) In order to optimize the iAFC effect, perform the automatic adjustment. (page 88) 20 CLP-175 Basic Operation CLP-175 21 Panel Controls and Terminals D C CONTRAST B NO G E YES J K N H I GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT VARIATION P ON/OFF MIDI SETTING iAFC SETTING OTHER SETTING O Q iAFC SPLIT EXIT F D 6 SONG SELECT SONG MIN NEW SONG SONG BALANCE DEMO 3 4 Basic Operation 2 S T 7 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD MAX MASTER VOLUME L VOICE 5 SYNCHRO START 9 SONG A C METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A DOWN EFFECT D UP TEMPO 0 M C B 8 U TRACK 1 SONG SONG SELECT KEYBOARD TOP TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE START/STOP REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START TEMPO C REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT D VOICE SONG ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION EXIT MIN EFFECT a POWER 1 PHONES A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 R _ Center “C” Top panel 1 [POWER]..............................................P18 2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P19 3 SONG BALANCE..................................P47 4 [DEMO] ...............................................P24 5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ 6 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] / ].........P26, 40, 57 [EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 40–45, 59 7 [FILE] ...................................................P48 8 [TOP] / SONG [START/STOP] ................................................P26, 41, 58 9 [REC]....................................................P41 0 [SONG SETTING] ................................P75 A METRONOME [START/STOP] / [SETTING]......................................P39, 78 B TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .............P27, 39, 58 C LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] / C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P23 D LCD screen ..........................................P23 22 CLP-175 E [CONTRAST] knob...............................P19 F [EXIT]...................................................P23 G Voice group buttons ...........................P30 H [VOICE SETTING] ................................P79 I [SPLIT] .................................................P37 J [REVERB]..............................................P33 K [CHORUS] ............................................P33 L VARIATION [▼] [▲] .............................P30 M BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] [BRIGHT].......P32 N iAFC [ON/OFF] ....................................P34 O [iAFC SETTING] ...................................P87 P [MIDI SETTING]...................................P89 Q [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P93 R [PHONES] ............................................P19 S Soft pedal ............................................P31 T Sostenuto pedal ..................................P31 U Damper pedal .....................................P31 Panel Controls and Terminals Connectors V [AUX PEDAL] ..................................... P61 W MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P61 X HOST SELECT..................................... P61 Y [TO HOST] ......................................... P61 Z [USB].................................................. P61 [ AUX IN ............................................... P62 \ AUX OUT............................................ P62 ] [PEDAL] ............................................ P115 _ Floppy disk drive................................ P12 \ GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GMcompatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This is a sound map format supported by Clavinovas and many other Yamaha MIDI instruments. Tone generators and music data compatible with this format carry the DOC logo. Basic Operation a Panel logos [ LEVEL FIXED R L R L/L+R AUX OUT R L/L+R AUX IN PC-2 MIDI IN AUX PEDAL V OUT MIDI W Mac USB THRU HOST SELECT TO HOST USB X Y Z a ` ] PEDAL iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) This is functionality that uses a multi-channel speaker system to generate three-dimensional acoustical effects from musical instruments. C LCD buttons D LCD Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD. Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit. F [EXIT] button When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the screen that indicates a voice name(s) and is displayed when the power is turned on). A B NO C YES D CLP-175 23 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes For each voice group, the Clavinova contains one demo song that shows off the character of the voices. This section explains how to listen to the demo songs for the voice groups listed below. Demonstration tunes Voice group Tunes GRAND PIANO1 HARPSICHORD Composer Consolation No.3 Gavotte F.Liszt J.S.Bach Basic Operation The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts the original compositions. All other songs are original (©2003 Yamaha Corporation). 2 3 1 4 SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A B CONTRAST UP Voice group buttons GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG 3 VOICE EFFECT 4 Procedure 1. Engage the demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode. The indicators of the voice group buttons will blink in succession. 24 CLP-175 TERMINOLOGY Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. Listening to the Demonstration Tunes 2. Select a tune and start playback. Press the voice group button for the demo song that you want to hear. The indicator of the voice group button you pressed will light, and the demo song will begin playing. Subsequently, the demo songs will play back consecutively from the upper left voice group button until you stop the playback. 4. Stop the playback. Press the button of the voice group being played or the SONG [START/STOP] button. TIP To adjust the volume balance between the song playback and the sound you are playing on the keyboard, use the [SONG BALANCE] slider (page 47) . Basic Operation 3. NOTE To adjust the volume level of the demo songs, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. Exit from demo mode. Press the [DEMO] or [EXIT] button to exit from demo mode. By holding down the [DEMO] button and pressing the A[–]/[+] buttons to get the [PianoDemo] display, you can hear the piano demo / iAFC demo. The piano demo lets you compare the result of enabling/disabling each sampling technology. The iAFC demo lets you compare three iAFC types. The demo songs are assigned to the sound buttons as follows. GRAND PIANO1 ................. Stereo Piano (stereo sampling) GRAND PIANO2 ................. Mono Piano (mono sampling) E.PIANO1 ............................ mezzo piano (dynamic sampling, mezzopiano) E.PIANO2 ............................ mezzo forte (dynamic sampling, mezzoforte) HARPSICHORD .................. forte (dynamic sampling, forte) E.CLAVICHORD.................. with Sustain (with sustain sampling) VIBRAPHONE ..................... no Sustain (without sustain sampling) GUITAR ............................... with KeyOff (with key-off sampling) CHURCH ORGAN............... no KeyOff (without key-off sampling) JAZZ ORGAN...................... with StringRes (with string resonance) STRINGS............................. no StringRes (without string resonance) GHOIR................................. with iAFC SEE(iAFC spatial ensemble effect) SYNTH.PAD ........................ with iAFC NSB (iAFC natural soundboard) WOOD BASS ...................... with iAFC DDE (iAFC dynamic damper effect) CLP-175 25 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 26) or use them for practice (page 28). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” that contains the scores for 50 piano preset songs. Playing the 50 piano preset songs Basic Operation 1 METRONOME [START/STOP] SONG SELECT SONG METRONOME START/STOP SETTING TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD DOWN A B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG DEMO 3 2 VOICE EFFECT 4 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Select a song. Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050. Song select screen A B NO C TERMINOLOGY Song: On the Clavinova, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. YES D The song number appears on the display. 2. Play a preset song. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. the number of measures A B NO C YES D TIP • You can also use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song after pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. • [P-000: NewSong] is a blank song provided for you to record your performance. (See page 40.) • Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. (See page 77.) TIP You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. 26 CLP-175 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song select screen. A B NO 3. NOTE Resetting the tempo Whenever you select a new preset song, the tempo is automatically reset to the song’s original value. Basic Operation C YES TIP You can also use the D[–]/[+] buttons to change the tempo. D Stop the song playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [TOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops when you press the button. Fast forward and rewind You can perform the following operations in the song select screen: • Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the song while the song is played or stopped. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. 4. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TIP If you have selected a disc song and there is a folder before the song, the folder will appear on the display when you press the SONG SELECT [ ][ ] buttons or C [–]/[+] buttons during song playback. TERMINOLOGY Default screen: The default screen is a voice select screen (page 30) that appears when you turn on the power to the Clavinova. CLP-175 27 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2]. 1 SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT Basic Operation MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG VOICE EFFECT 3 2 procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or [TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part. TIP You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. When you first select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can cause playback to begin when you play the keyboard (Synchro Start). Hold down the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. The SONG [START/STOP] indicator will blink, and the Clavinova will wait for Syncro Start. Now when you play the keyboard, playback will begin at the same moment. If you press the [TOP] button while waiting, Synchro Start will be cancelled. 28 CLP-175 TERMINOLOGY Synchro: Synchronous;occurring at the same time Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [TOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP Resetting the part playback Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever you select a new song. Basic Operation You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 76. CLP-175 29 Selecting and Playing Voices Selecting Voices SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A Voice group buttons 1 2 B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG 2 VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG VOICE EFFECT Procedure Basic Operation 1. 2. Select a voice group. Press a voice group button. TERMINOLOGY Voice On the Clavinova, a voice means “tone” or “tonal color.” Select a voice. Use the VARIATION [▼]/[▲] buttons or the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. TIP You can also switch between voices in the same group by pressing a voice group button repeatedly. If you select XG If you select XG, you can select the XG voice group first, then select the desired voice. 2-1. Simultaneously press the [–][+] screen buttons located beside the XG voice name display, to access a screen where you can select XG voices. 2-2. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the voice group. 2-3. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select the desired voice. Voice group GRANDPIANO1 GRANDPIANO2 E.PIANO1 E.PIANO2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR Voice name GrandPiano1 MellowPiano RockPiano HonkyTonkPiano GrandPiano2 BrightPiano E.Piano1 SynthPiano E.Piano2 Vintage E.Piano Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' E.Clavichord Wah Clavi. Vibraphone Marimba Celesta NylonGuitar SteelGuitar Voice group CHURCHORGAN JAZZORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH.PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG Voice name PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganTutti PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 JazzOrgan RotaryOrgan MellowOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat SynthPad1 SynthPad2 WoodBass Bass&Cymbal ElectricBass FretlessBass XGVoice • For details on XG voices, refer to “XG voice list” (the separate reference booklet). 30 CLP-175 TIP To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice group (page 24). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 111 for more information on characteristics of each preset voice. TIP You can control the loudness of a voice by how hard you play the keyboard, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with the sound of certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 111. TIP XG is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. TIP If you select XG and then simultaneously press the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons, the XG voice select screen will appear. Selecting and Playing Voices Using the pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. When you press the damper pedal, the notes you play have a longer sustain. When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. Sostenuto (center) pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not sustain. Basic Operation Damper (right) pedal TIP If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the PEDAL jack on the unit (see step 3 on page 115). Also, make sure that the RPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu is set to ON (see page 85). TIP You can adjust the depth of the resonance produced by the “Sustain Samples” using the Sustain Sampling Depth parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu. (See page 95.) When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft pedal (left) The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you play the target notes.) With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 95.) TIP You can assign a function to each pedal via the “R Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L Pedal” parameters in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. (See pages 85, 86.) TIP The center and left pedals can also be assigned to song start/stop operation (START/STOP function) via the “PedalStart/Stop” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu (on page 96). CLP-175 31 Selecting and Playing Voices Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance, Reverb, and Chorus. [REVERB] Basic Operation [CHORUS] SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG DEMO VOICE EFFECT BRILLIANCE [MELLOW] / [BRIGHT] [BRILLIANCE] You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference. Procedure Press one of the BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/ [BRIGHT] buttons to select the desired tonality. A B NO C Mellow3 Mellow2 Mellow1 YES D Soft and mellow tone. The sound becomes more mellow and rounder as the number increases. Normal........... Standard tone Bright1 Bright2 Bright tone. The sound becomes brighter as the number increases. Bright3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. 32 CLP-175 TIP You can press the BRILLIANCE [MELLOW]/ [BRIGHT] buttons, and then use the D [–]/[+] buttons to select the desired tonality. TIP Normal setting = Normal TERMINOLOGY Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. NOTE If you select [Bright1], [Bright2] or [Bright3] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. Under this condition, if you raise the [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting, the sound may become distorted. In this case, lower the volume accordingly. Selecting and Playing Voices [REVERB] This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Procedure Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off. Basic Operation Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is selected. TIP You can select a reverb type via the Reverb Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. (See page 81.) TIP Normal setting = ON [CHORUS] This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound. Procedure Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the chorus on and off. You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 82). The [CHORUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting. TIP You can select a chorus type via the Chorus Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the chorus depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. You can also turn chorus on or off via the Chorus On Off parameter. (See page 81.) TIP Normal Setting The normal chorus on/off setting is different for each voice. CLP-175 33 Selecting and Playing Voices To enhance the acoustic realism of the sound ...[iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control)] When iAFC is engaged, the Clavinova will sound deeper and more resonant, similar to an acoustic musical instruments. • To turn on the iAFC, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the iAFC will not be turned on. • Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and after each time you move the Clavinova. (page 88) Basic Operation iAFC [ON/OFF] Procedure iAFC will toggle on or off each time you press iAFC [ON/ OFF] switch. TIP How iAFC works Sounds picked up by mics and sounds produced internally by the Clavinova are processed and output from the speaker on the bottom face to enhance acoustic realism of the sound. iAFC uses Yamaha’s EMR (Electronic Microphone Rotator) technology to ensure stability against acoustic feedback. TIP iAFC cannot be used in the following cases: • When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. • When the Speaker setting is Normal, and headphones are connected. • When the Speaker setting is Off. TIP When using iAFC, do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova. The optimal iAFC effect cannot be obtained if this speaker is blocked. TIP [iAFC SETTING] lets you select the type of iAFC and adjust the depth of the effect. (page 87) TIP Normal setting = ON 34 CLP-175 Selecting and Playing Voices Combining two voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 113 for examples of effective voice combinations. The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from different groups. SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN 2 A B Voice group buttons 1 3 2 CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT Basic Operation EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG DEMO The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from the same group. VOICE 2 3 1 4 EFFECT Voice group buttons Dual mode using voices in different voice groups Procedure 1. Enter Dual mode. Press two voice group buttons simultaneously. Voice 1 Voice 2 A B NO C 2. 3. YES D TIP If you want to select Dual mode for the left-hand area when the entire keyboard is divided into left and right areas (page 37), hold down [SPLIT] and simultaneously press two voice group buttons. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. TIP You can also use the VARIATION [▼]/[▲] buttons to select the voice 1. The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 111 are called voice 1, and those listed in the bottom row are called voice 2. TIP Refer to page 30 for details on how to select XG voices. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any voice group button. CLP-175 35 Selecting and Playing Voices Dual mode using voices in the same voice group Procedure Basic Operation 1. 2. 3. Select a voice group. In normal play mode, press the desired voice group button. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. Select another voice. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the same voice group. To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly. A B NO C 4. 36 CLP-175 YES D Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any voice group button. TIP If you want to select Dual mode for the left-hand area when the entire keyboard is devided into left and right areas (page 37), press the D [–]/[+] buttons. Selecting and Playing Voices Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the [WOOD BASS] or [E. BASS] voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 113 for examples of effective voice combinations. 3 4 1 3 4 5 Voice group buttons Basic Operation 2 3 2 Procedure 1. 2. 3. Enter Split mode. Press the [SPLIT] button. Select a voice for the right hand. Use the voice group buttons and the VARIATION [▼]/[▲] buttons to select the voice for the right-hand area. TIP You can also use the A [–]/ [+] buttons to select a voice for the right-hand area. Select a voice for the left hand. Hold down the [SPLIT] button, and press a voice group button to select the voice group for the left-hand area. TIP Refer to page 30 for details on how to select XG voice. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. CLP-175 37 Selecting and Playing Voices 4. Specify the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range). The normal setting of the split point is “F 2.” F2 TIP The split point can also be set by the [OTHER SETTING] parameter [SplitPoint]. (page 94) Center “C” To change the split point setting: Basic Operation Hold down the [SPLIT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] buttons to specify the split point. (Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT] button and play the key you wish to assign as the split point. A B NO C YES D Release the [SPLIT] button to return to the main screen. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. Press the [SPLIT] button. You can use Dual (see page 35) in each area (right-hand and left-hand) of Split mode. A B NO C 38 CLP-175 TIP A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. YES D Selecting and Playing Voices Using the metronome The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for practice. 1 2 SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG DEMO VOICE EFFECT Basic Operation TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Start the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. Adjusting the tempo Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button. A B NO C YES D To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–500), use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal (default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons or the D [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen. 2. TIP The default tempo is 120. (If a song has been selected, the song tempo is used.) TIP You can set the time signature, metronome volume, and metronome tone using the METRONOME [SETTING] button. (See page 78.) Stop the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. CLP-175 39 Recording Your Performance TIP You can record your performance (audio data) to a cassette tape recorder or other recording devices via the AUX OUT jacks. (see page 62.) Basic Operation This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova recording function. You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova keyboard for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part, then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the leftand right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed performance or ensemble song one by one to build a song. TERMINOLOGY Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 98 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. Recording a New Song Recording to [TRACK 1] 2 1 3 SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG DEMO VOICE EFFECT 4 4 5 Procedure 1. Select “NewSong” for recording. Press the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons simultaneously. New Song screen A B NO C 40 CLP-175 YES D NOTE If you select a song other than “P-000: NewSong” and record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. Recording Your Performance 2. NOTE Set the tempo in Step 3. Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus. Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to set the volume level to suit your preference. You can also use the dial to adjust the level during playback. After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the New Song screen. NOTE See page 47 for more information on recording in Dual/ Split mode. Basic Operation 3. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 30). Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [TOP] button.) Record standby screen A B NO C YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once. 4. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start recording. The recording screen displays the current measure number. Record screen A B NO C YES D TIP You can record data while using the metronome. The metronome is not recorded. TIP When you press the SONG [START/STOP] button during recording, recording is paused. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again or play a note on the keyboard. Measure number in recording To stop recording, press the [TOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. TIP When you press the [REC] button, recording pauses. The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is automatically cancelled.) CLP-175 41 Recording Your Performance 5. Play back the recorded performance. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to play back the recorded performance. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [TOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops when you press the button. NOTE To erase recorded data from a track, use the Channel Clear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu. (See page 76.) Basic Operation When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the SaveToMemory parameter (page 50) or SaveToDisk parameter (page 51) in the File menu. Re-recording TRACK 1 This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory. Procedure 1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 41 if you wish to change the previous settings. Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 41 to re-record. The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data. 42 CLP-175 Recording Your Performance Re-recording TRACK 1 partially This section explains how to record part of a song again. Procedure 1. NOTE If the playback screen is not displayed, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ][ ] buttons once. Basic Operation Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed to move through the measures or play back the recording and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Playback screen A B NO C 2. 3. 3-1 YES D Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 41 if you wish to change the previous settings. Select the recording method and enter record mode. Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should end. While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following recording method select screen appears. A B NO C YES D Starting methods: Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts. Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased. CLP-175 43 Recording Your Performance Ending methods: Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased. Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain. 3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. TIP If you cancel recording by pressing the [REC] button, recording stops when you press the button. If you cancel recording by pressing the [TOP] button, the Clavinova locates the top of the song. Basic Operation The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [TOP] button.) Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 41. Recording to [TRACK2] This section explains how to record another part on the second track. 1 2 SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording. Repeat Step 2 on page 41. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 2] button. The [TRACK 2] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [TOP] button.) TIP Pressing the [TRACK 1] button repeatedly toggles between playback on (the indicator lights up in green) and off (the indicator turns off). Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 41. You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data. 44 CLP-175 Recording Your Performance Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one. Procedure 1. Basic Operation Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Recording to [TRACK2]” on page 44 and use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select a recording track (3–16). select a recording track (3-16) A B NO C 2. YES D While holding down the [REC] button, press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 41. Other recording techniques Adding data to or recording over an existing song The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs [P-001—P-050], commercially-available music data [see page 60], or your old recorded performances [see page 48]). Procedure 1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050). Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000: NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on page 40. To select a song from commercial music data sold in stores or from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2 on page 57. NOTE If you record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 40 to 45. CLP-175 45 Recording Your Performance Changing a voice or tempo after recording You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a song. Procedure Basic Operation 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/ [+] buttons. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.). For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E. Piano2, use the voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons to select E.Piano2. When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the track to change. The indicator for the selected track lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary. At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the SONG [START/ STOP] button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data. 5. 46 CLP-175 Press the [TOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode. NOTE Before changing a voice or tempo, set the starting method to “Normal.” (page 43) When the starting method is set to “KeyOn,” you cannot change a voice or tempo. TIP Refer to “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 104 for information on the settings that can be changed here. TIP Change the tempo in Step 4. CAUTION The edited settings (except for the tempo setting) will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous settings. Proceed with caution. Recording Your Performance Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance. Procedure 1. SONG Your playing volume will be lower. KEYBOARD SONG BALANCE The song playback volume will be lower. TIP Some commercially-available music data contains extremely high volumes. When using such data, please adjust the song balance. Basic Operation Move [SONG BALANCE] to the left or right to make adjustments. TIP The song balance setting is also used during playback. (See page 57.) Recording in Dual or Split mode When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The following table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice. CAUTION When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 45), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution. In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording. Tracks assigned for recording Tracks used for recording Dual Split Split+Dual TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ MAIN (voice 1) TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn LEFT (voice 1) – MAIN (voice 2) TRACK3 LEFT (voice 2) – TRACK4 TRACKn +2 TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1 – TRACK3 TRACKn +2 – TRACK4 TRACKn +3 Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16 If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used. TIP Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded. CLP-175 47 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song files (e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), copy and format disks, and change the characters on the screen. Basic Operation The following parameters are provided for these operations: Settings Parameter name Reference page Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 50 Saves recorded and other songs on floppy disks SaveToDisk 51 Deletes song data from Clavinova momery or floppy disk DeleteSong 52 Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 53 Copies data from floppy disk to floppy disk CopyDisk 54 Formats a floppy disk FormatDisk 55 Automatically open a song when the disk is inserted FD SongAutoOpen 56 Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 56 Clavinova memory The Clavinova has the following three types of memory: • Current memory: This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the currently-selected song before playback or recording. • Preset song memory: This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs. • Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save recorded songs or song data loaded from floppy disk. When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song memory, Storage memory, or floppy disk, into Current memory. You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Storage memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Storage memory or on a floppy disk (see pages 50, 51). In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is referred to as a “Current song,” a song in Storage memory is a “Memory song,” and a song on a floppy disk is a “Disk song”. Preset song memory Storage memory Current memory TRACK 1 SONG SELECT SONG KEYBOARD TOP TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE START/STOP REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START SONG TEMPO C D VOICE EFFECT POWER Floppy disk 48 Clavinova CLP-175 TERMINOLOGY File A file contains a group of data. On the Clavinova, a song file includes song data and a song number. Memory Memory is a location inside the Clavinova in which you can save and edit data. Formatting (Initializing) Floppy disks are a convenient media that allow you to save various data for personal computers and other devices. There are many ways (formats) to save data on floppy disks, depending on the device. Therefore, you need to prepare a floppy disk by assigning a format before you can use it on a particular type of device. This operation is called “formatting.” Character code Type of characters TIP Please note that the copy features are intended for your personal use only. Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Basic file operation A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 98 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take. 2 3 SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD 3 METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG DEMO VOICE 5 Basic Operation 4 EFFECT Procedure 1. Select a song, or have a floppy disk ready. 2. Access the File menu. Select a song you wish to save or rename. (Optional) Insert a floppy disk for copying or formatting into the disk drive. Press the [FILE] button. A B NO C YES D To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice. 3. Select the desired parameter. 4. Set the parameter or execute the command. 5. Close the File menu. Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired item from the following: “SaveToMemory”, “SaveToDisk”, “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”, “CopyDisk”, “FormatDisk”, “FDSongAutoOpen”, “CharacterCode”. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons. For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corresponding section below. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-175 49 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory] If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory or to a floppy disk. (To save a song to a floppy disk, refer to the next section [SaveToDisk].) You can also save the preset songs, disk songs, and additional or overwriting recordings (page 45) to Storage memory. Basic Operation A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 49 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Name the song. To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons. To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously. To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons. To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously. You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and scroll the name. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→”. “Sure?→” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again to confirm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button.) The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the operation. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears. The song is automatically numbered as “M—,” where “M” means “Memory” and “—” is a number. TIP If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavinova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 50 CLP-175 TIP • You can change the type of characters on the screen using the CharacterCode parameter. • When you select a saved song later, the name with an extension “.MID” will appear. TERMINOLOGY “Execute?→”: Do you wish to execute the operation? “Sure?→”: Are you sure? “Executing”: The Clavinova is executing the operation. “Completed”: The operation is complete. CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Saving recorded or other songs to floppy disk...[SaveToDisk] Songs you record, memory songs, or recordings you added or recorded over (page 45) previously-recorded memory songs can be saved on a floppy disk. A B NO Basic Operation C YES D Procedure See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4. Make sure that a formatted floppy disk (page 55) is inserted in the disk drive. Follow the steps for the [SaveToMemory] operation (see page 50) to name and save the song. The song is automatically numbered as “D—,” where “D” means “Disk” and “—” is a number. TIP The song data is saved in the SMF format (format 0). Therefore, you can play the disk on instruments that support the SMF format. TIP To specify a folder on the disk as the save location ... When the “Sure?->” display appears, press either the C [–]/[+] buttons to display the folder. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select the folder. You can use the D [+] button to enter a folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (higher) level. You cannot create folders on the CLP-175. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” CLP-175 51 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory or a floppy disk...[DeleteSong] You can delete Memory songs and Disk songs, but not Preset songs or Current songs. A B Basic Operation NO C YES D TIP To delete a Current song, select “ALL” for the ChannelClear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 76). Alternatively, press the SONG SELECT [ ][ ] buttons simultaneously to display “Song Changed Save?”. This means “A song has been edited. Do you wish to save the change?” Press the B [– (NO)] button. The Current song is deleted and a blank “NewSong” is selected. Procedure See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Select a song to delete. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. TIP If you select a Memory song or Disk song, deleting the song does not erase song data from Current memory. However, if you return to the song select screen, song information other than the song name is replaced by “-------------”. TIP After you delete a song, the Clavinova automatically updates the song numbers. TIP When you delete a folder from disk, all files within that folder will be deleted. → → TIP If a folder is displayed for a disk song, the [ / ] indicator is displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. CAUTION Never turn off the power or remove the floppy disk while [Executing] is displayed. 52 CLP-175 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Renaming a song...[RenameSong] You can change a song’s title except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong]. A B NO C YES D Basic Operation Procedure See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory] section (page 50). CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” TIP After you rename a song, the Clavinova sorts songs alphabetically and renumbers them. CLP-175 53 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Copying data from one floppy disk to another...[CopyDisk] You can copy the entire contents of one floppy disk to another floppy disk. A B Basic Operation NO C YES D Procedure See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4-1 Make sure that a formatted floppy disk is inserted in the disk drive. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” 4-3 When the screen indicates “Insrt Target Disk”, eject the source disk and insert the destination disk. When the copy operation is complete, the Clavinova displays “Completed.” TIP Use the same type of disk (2DD or 2HD) for the destination disk as the source disk. TERMINOLOGY Insrt Target Disk: Insert the destination (target) disk. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” 54 CLP-175 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Formatting a floppy disk...[FormatDisk] You can format a floppy disk so that it can be used with the Clavinova. A B NO C YES D Basic Operation Procedure Refer to page 49 for the basic procedure. Perform the following operations in step 4. 4-1 Make sure that the formatted floppy disk is inserted in the disk drive. 4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. CAUTION Do not turn off the power or eject the floppy disk while the screen displays “Executing.” CLP-175 55 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Automatically open a song when the disk is inserted [FDSongAutoOpen] Basic Operation Specify whether a song will automatically be opened when you insert a disk. Procedure Refer to page 49 for the basic procedure. Perform the following operation in step 4. 4 Use the D [–]/[+] buttons to select ON or OFF. Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode] You can change the type of characters that appear on screen. The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.” A B NO C Options: International, Japanese Character list [International] [Japanese] 56 CLP-175 YES D Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data TIP See page 59 for information on the types of song data that can be played on the Clavinova. You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 40) as well as commercially-available music data. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. TIP Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200–300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. TIP Change the Clavinova’s character type ([CharacterCord]) as appropriate for the selected song. Basic Operation Playing back a song If you want to play back a disk song, insert the floppy disk into the disk drive. TEMPO [DOWN][UP] 1 2-2 SONG SELECT SONG 2-1 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN A B CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG DEMO 43 [SONG BALANCE] VOICE 2-2 EFFECT 5 Procedure Display the song select screen. Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons. Song select screen A B NO C 2. D Select the desired song. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “PresetSong,” “MemorySong,” or “DiskSong”. If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavinova displays “MemorySong.” If a floppy disk that contains song data is inserted in the drive, the Clavinova displays “DiskSong”. 2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ select a song. ]/[ ] buttons to TIP If a folder is displayed for a disk song, the [ / ] indicator is displayed in the lower right of the screen. In this case, you can use the D [+] button to open the folder. Press the D [–] button to return to the previous (upper) level. → 2-1 TIP Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 77) to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. YES → 1. TIP You can enjoy ensemble performance by yourself. Record the parts for a fourhanded song or a piano duet, then play the recorded part while playing the other part on the keyboard. TIP If the song name extends beyond what can be displayed in the screen, you can press the D [+] button to move toward the right in steps of one character. Press the D [–] button to move back to the left in steps of one character. CLP-175 57 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data 3. Start playback. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) Basic Operation You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. The SONG [START/STOP] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [TOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is playing or stopped. The bar number in playback A B NO C YES ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. 4. 58 CLP-175 TIP You can play the metronome along with the song playback. When you stop playback, the metronome is also stopped. D You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback parts and your current performance using the [SONG BALANCE] slider. (See page 47.) Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. TERMINOLOGY Bar: measure ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [TOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP In the song select screen: • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. However, if you have selected a disc song and there is a folder before the song, the folder will appear on the display when you press the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons or C [–]/[+] buttons during song playback. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[– ] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data 5. Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. Eject the floppy disk from the disk drive if you have been playing a disk song. Turning track playback on and off TIP You can practice a part or phrase using the FromToRepeat (page 76) and PhraseMark parameters (page 77) in the “SONG SETTING” menu. Basic Operation When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that contain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned off. Supported song data type Data formats that can be played on the CLP-175 The Clavinova CLP-175 plays song data in the following formats: Floppy disk format 3.5-inch 2DD disks in the MS-DOS 720KB format 3.5-inch 2HD disks in the MS-DOS 1.44MB format TERMINOLOGY Disk format: A structured method for writing data to disk. Sequence format SMF (Standard MIDI File) formats 0 and 1 ESEQ Performance data recorded on the CLP-175 is saved in the SMF format 0 in a floppy disk. TERMINOLOGY Sequence format: A structured method for recording performance data. CLP-175 59 Playing Back Recorded Songs and Commercially-available Music Data Voice arrangement format XG voice arrangement GM system level 1 voice arrangement DOC voice arrangement Basic Operation Performance data recorded with preset XG voices on the CLP-175 can be played on other XG-compatible instruments. See page 6 of the separate “Reference Booklet” for the XG voice list. Refer to “Data compatibility” on page 109 for more information on formats. 60 CLP-175 TERMINOLOGY Voice arrangement format: A structured method for numbering the voices for assignment. Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. 7 6 LEVEL FIXED L R L/L+R AUX OUT R L/L+R AUX IN PC-2 MIDI IN AUX PEDAL 1 OUT MIDI 2 Basic Operation R Mac USB THRU HOST SELECT TO HOST USB 3 4 5 1 AUX PEDAL jack A separately sold FC7 foot controller or FC4/FC5 foot switch can be connected to this jack. By using an FC7 you can control the volume while playing to add expression to your performance, or control various other functions. By using an FC4/FC5, you can switch various selected functions on/off. To select the function that will be controlled, use the [VOICE SETTING] parameter [AuxPedal] (See page 86). The SONG [START/STOP] function can also be assigned to a foot switch (See page 96). TIP Connect or disconnect the pedal when the power is off. 2 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page) to MIDI when you use these connectors. 3 HOST SELECT switch This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.) 4 TO HOST jack This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.) 5 USB jack This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 63 for more information.) CLP-175 61 Connections 6 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. Basic Operation CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R L/L+R Plug shape depends on the device. AUX IN AUX IN AUX OUT phone plug (standard) Tone Generator audio cable 7 AUX OUT [R][L] Pin jacks (LEVEL FIXED), [R][L/L+R] Phone jacks These jacks let you connect the Clavinova to your stereo system etc. to play at higher volumes, or connect a cassette recorder etc. to record your playing. Use audio cables to make connections as shown in the diagram. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R L R L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN RCA pin plug audio cable When these are connected (with RCA pin plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level, regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting. 62 CLP-175 TIP If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack. CAUTION Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. That is, when you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, do not connect the audio device to the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the AUX IN jacks will be output from AUX OUT. This creates an audio loop, causing audio oscillation and abnormal playback, and leading to malfunction of both pieces of equipment. TIP Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. LEVEL FIXED Stereo RCA pin plug TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] dial setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and [BRILLIANCE] (page 32) settings do not. phone plug (standard) To powered speakers When these are connected (with standard phone plugs), you can use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] setting will not affect the sound that is output from AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED). Connections Connecting a personal computer You can connect the [TO HOST], MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU], or [USB] connector of the Clavinova to your personal computer and enjoy using the Clavinova in conjunction with musical software on your computer. Basic Operation “The Clavinova-Computer Connection,” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site (English only): http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ Yamaha Manual Library: http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer: 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 64) 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 66) 3. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB jack (page 67) For more information, refer to the following pages. TIP When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova. TIP If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must disconnect the cable from the [TO HOST] jack or [USB] jack. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a cable is left connected. TIP The connectors that can be used will depend on the setting of the HOST SELECT switch. HOST SELECT switch setting Usable connectors [MIDI] [MIDI] connectors (all: [IN][OUT][THRU]) [PC-2], [Mac] [TO HOST] jack [USB] [USB] jack CLP-175 63 Connections 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special MIDI interface. Connection Use a special serial cable (page 65) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. Basic Operation Clavinova PC-2 MIDI Mac USB HOST SELECT TO HOST TO HOST RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) modem port Windows Macintosh Note for Windows users (regarding the MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a specific MIDI driver (the Yamaha CBX driver for Windows). You can download this driver from XG Library on the Yamaha Web site (http://www.yamaha-xg.com) or install from the Accessory CD-ROM included with the Clavinova. 64 CLP-175 Connections Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables. • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 3 4 8 5 D-sub 9-pin 3 (TxD) System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-TG or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 (HSK i) mini DIN 1 (HSK O) 8-pin 5 (RxD-) 4 (GND) 3 (TxD-) 8 (RxD+) 7 (GP-) 6 (TxD+) Basic Operation 8 (CTS) 7 (RTS) 2 (RxD) 5 (GND) • Macintosh • Pin assignment The following diagram shows the pin assignments for each cable. Pin numbers (view from front) mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 9-pin 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer. • Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock) • Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps) TIP If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. CLP-175 65 Connections 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors Connection Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables. Clavinova Basic Operation PC-2 MIDI IN OUT THRU MIDI MIDI IN HOST SELECT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT Mac USB MIDI IN MIDI interface MIDI interface Windows Macintosh Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” 66 CLP-175 Connections 3. Connecting the USB port on the computer to the Clavinova’s USB jack If you connect the Clavinova to your computer, you can transfer MIDI data between your computer and the Clavinova. You can also use the included File Utility (software for your computer) to transfer files between your computer and the internal memory of the Clavinova. Connections Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the [USB] jack on the Clavinova. computer Clavinova PC-2 MIDI Mac USB Basic Operation USB HOST SELECT TO HOST USB TRACK 1 SONG SONG SELECT KEYBOARD TOP TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE START/STOP REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A CONTRAST B NO DOWN YES UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START SONG TEMPO C D VOICE EFFECT POWER USB cable TIP There are two types of USB connectors: A and B. The USB jack on the Clavinova accepts a B-type connector. Connect the A-type connector of the USB cable to the USB port on your computer. Connect the B-type connector to the USB jack on the Clavinova. Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “USB.” About the USB driver You must install the specified USB driver (YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver) in your computer before you can transfer data between the computer and the Clavinova. The YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver can be installed from the Accessory CD-ROM included with the Clavinova. The YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver supports the following OS versions. Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional Mac OS 8.6–9.2.2 (Mac OS X and Mac Classic environments are not supported.) CLP-175 67 Connections About the USB connection Basic Operation • In order to use MIDI on your computer, you will need application software that is appropriate for your computer and that meets your needs. • If you want to use a USB cable to connect the Clavinova to your computer, you must connect the USB cable before turning on the power of the Clavinova. Also, do not turn the power of the Clavinova on or off while application software that uses USB MIDI is running. • The Clavinova will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • When using a USB cable to connect the Clavinova to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • Depending on the state of your computer, the operating state of the Clavinova may become unstable. Do not use your computer in a way that causes it to enter an unstable state. CAUTION • If you turn the power of the Clavinova on/off or connect/disconnect the USB cable in the following states, problems will occur in the computer system, possibly causing it to “freeze” (hang up), or causing the Clavinova to stop functioning. - While installing the driver - While starting-up or shutting-down the operating system - While your computer is suspended (sleeping) - While a MIDI application is running • Performing the following actions may cause your computer to hang up or the Clavinova to stop functioning. - Rapidly turning the power on/off or connecting/disconnecting the cable - Shifting to power-conservation (sleep) mode while MIDI data is being transferred, or returning from sleep mode - Connecting/disconnecting the cable while the power of the Clavinova is on - Turning the power of the Clavinova on/off, starting up your computer, or installing the driver while a large amount of data is being transferred 68 CLP-175 Detailed Settings CLP-175 69 Detailed Settings You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch, selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. For the basic procedure to make these settings, refer to page 97. Parameter List The following parameters are available. Recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Settings Detailed Settings Correcting note timing Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing Auditioning the channels Deleting data by each channel Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number Playing back a song repeatedly Parameter name Reference page Quantize 75 QuickPlay 76 ChannelListen ChannelClear FromToRepeat 76 76 76 PhraseMark 77 SongRepeat 77 Metronome METRONOME [SETTING] Settings Metronome time signature Metronome volume level Metronome voice 70 CLP-175 Parameter name TimeSignature MetronomeVolume MetronomeSound Reference page 78 78 78 Detailed Settings Voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode, parameters with the “ *” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Parameter name Reference page Octave* Volume level* Position of right and left channels* Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Reverb type Reverb depth* Chorus type Chorus depth* Chorus on/off Select the DSP type* Set the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* Turn the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off* Adjust the speed of the rotary speaker* Adjust the DSP effect depth* Adjust the brightness of the sound* Adjust the resonance effect* Adjust the low-range frequency of the equalizer* Adjust the low-range gain (boost/cut) of the equalizer* Adjust the high-range frequency of the equalizer* Adjust the high-range gain (boost/cut) of the equalizer* Touch sensitivity* Right pedal function Center pedal function Left pedal function Auxiliary pedal function Octave Volume Pan Detune ReverbType ReverbSend ChorusType ChorusSend ChorusOnOff DSP Type (DSP) VibeRotorSpeed VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff) RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed) DSPDepth Brightness HarmonicContent (Harmonic) EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq) 80 80 80 80 81 81 81 81 82 82 82 83 83 83 83 83 84 EQ LowGain 84 EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq) 84 EQ HighGain 84 TouchSense RPedal MPedal LPedal AuxPedal 85 85 85 86 86 Detailed Settings Settings iAFC [iAFC SETTING] Settings Select the iAFC type Adjust the iAFC depth Calibrate (automatically adjust) iAFC Restore the basic iAFC settings Parameter name iAFC Type iAFC Depth Calibration iAFC Default Reference page 87 87 88 88 CLP-175 71 Detailed Settings MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Settings MIDI transmit channel Specify the MIDI receive channel Local control on/off Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission Type of data received via MIDI Type of data transmitted via MIDI Transmitting the initial settings Voice data bulk dump Parameter name Reference page MidiOutChannel MidiInChannel LocalControl 90 90 91 MidiOutSelect 91 ReceiveParameter TransmitParameter InitialSetup VoiceBulkDump 91 91 92 92 [OTHER SETTING] Detailed Settings Settings Selecting a touch response Make fine pitch adjustments Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice Selecting a scale Specifying the Split Point Change the key Specify the depth of the Soft pedal Depth of string resonance Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal Specify the volume of the key-off sound Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone Assign the SONG [START/STOP] function to the pedal Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound Pitch bend range Switch the speaker on/off Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown Restoring the normal (default) settings 72 CLP-175 Parameter name Reference page TouchResponse Tune PianoTuningCurve Scale SplitPoint Transpose SoftPedalDepth StringResonanceDepth SustainSamplingDepth KeyOffSamplingDepth VibraphonePedalMode 93 93 93 94 94 94 95 95 95 95 95 PedalStart/Stop 96 AuxPedalType 96 HalfPedalPoint 96 PitchBendRange Speaker MemoryBackUp FactorySet 96 97 97 97 Detailed Settings Making detailed settings 1 SONG SELECT SONG TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE TOP START/STOP REC SONG SETTING KEYBOARD METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN 2 A 3 4 B 1 CONTRAST UP GRAND PIANO 1 GRAND PIANO 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR CHURCH ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE SETTING 1 ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EXIT MIN NEW SONG MAX MASTER VOLUME SONG BALANCE DEMO SYNCHRO START TEMPO C D SONG VOICE 1 2 3 3 5 EFFECT 1 1 Procedure 1. Detailed Settings Access a setting menu. Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], METRONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [iAFC SETTING], [MIDI SETTING], or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu. 2. 3. Select the desired parameter or part. Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly as required. Set the parameter or part. Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons to select or set the option. To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. CLP-175 73 Detailed Settings 4. Write, execute, or save the data. There are two ways to respond to the messages. If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to display confirmation ([Sure?→]). To proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B [+(YES)] button. A B NO Detailed Settings C YES D If “Set?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. However, the “Completed” display that appears when [Calibration] (page 88) and [VoiceBulkDump] (page 92) is finished will not change back to the previous display after three seconds. Press any button on the panel to return to the previous display. A B NO C 5. 74 CLP-175 Close the setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. YES D Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”), memory songs (“MemorySong”), or disk songs (“DiskSong”) (see page 57). Procedure Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu. [SONG SETTING] If you select “1/8” for correction: Correcting note timing [Quantize] Performance data Detailed Settings You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively (with a swing type of rhythm). • Changes are made by song. • You can also listen to the sound while changing the setting. To change the data, you need to respond to “Execute?→.” See the procedure on page 73. Swing rate = 50% : not swinging Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed. Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly early. Stores the changed value. A B NO C YES Swing rate = 67% : The timing of the even beat notes is moved to the third beat of the triplets. D 3 3 Specifies the type of note. Notes for which you can adjust the timing: [OFF] [1/4] quarter note [1/8] TIP Save the edited song data to memory or a disk. (See page 50.) eighth note 3 [1/12] eighth note triplets [1/16] sixteenth note 3 [1/24] sixteenth note triplets If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavinova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging. Setting range: 0% - 100% CLP-175 75 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] This parameter enables you to specify whether a song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a silence prior to the first note, should be played from the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank). See the procedure on page 73. Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear] You can delete data from each of 16 channels. See the procedure on page 73. Press this button to delete data. A B NO C A B NO YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for deletion. YES Setting range: C Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels) D Detailed Settings Setting range: [On] Playing from the first note [Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest or blank) Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] You can select a single channel to listen to its contents. Playback starts from the first note. See the procedure on page 73. Playback continues as long as you press and hold down this button. A B NO C YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for playback. Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16 TIP Usually, channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. However, for some songs, all channels (including the channels that contain no data) may be displayed. TIP • Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. However, for some songs, all channels (including the channels that contain no data) may be displayed. • Save the edited song data to memory or disk. (See page 50.) Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to play back repeatedly. • Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat specified as the end point. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified part until you press the [TOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts. See the procedure on page 73. Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.” A NO C Use these buttons to specify the start point of the repeated range. 76 CLP-175 B YES D Use these buttons to specify the end point of the repeated range. Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] TIP Use the following buttons to specify the range to be repeated during song playback. C [–]/[+] .......specifies the start point of the repeat. D [–]/[+] .......specifies the end point of the repeat. NOTE When you select another song, the specified range is automatically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off. Playing back the phrase specified by the phrase number [PhraseMark] Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song selected from the 50 preset songs or from the floppy disks. • When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the song you selected using the front panel, then starts repeat playback of the specified songs until you press the [TOP] button. See the procedure on page 73. Use these buttons to select “On.” A Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.” A B NO C YES NO C YES Detailed Settings If you select a song from an ensemble collection disk, such as the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can specify phrase numbers in the score to play back from the score from the mark point, or to play back the phrase repeatedly. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified phrase until you press the [TOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts from the specified phrase. See the procedure on page 73. B D Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs. Setting range: [DiskSongs] All songs in the floppy disk inserted in the disk drive [MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory [Disk+Memory] All songs from “DiskSongs” and “MemorySongs” [PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs [ALL] All songs from “DiskSongs,” “MemorySongs,” and “PresetSongs” [OneSong] One song selected from the front panel D Use these buttons to specify the phrase number. Setting range of the phrase number: Off (not specified) 1 - the last phrase number of the song If you select any song other than those from the “Disk Orchestra Collection” or one of the “XG for Piano” disks, you can select only “Off.” CLP-175 77 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome. Procedure Press the METRONOME [SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu. METRONOME [SETTING] Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature] See the procedure on page 73. See the procedure on page 73. Detailed Settings A A B NO C NO C Use these buttons to set the denominator of the time signature. For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.” 1 - 16 [BellOff] [EnglishVoice] [GermanVoice] [JapaneseVoice] [FrenchVoice] [SpanishVoice] [BellOn] Setting options for the denominator: 2, 4, and 8 Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume] See the procedure on page 73. A B NO Setting range: 0-127 78 CLP-175 YES D YES D Setting range: Setting range for the numerator: C B YES D Use these buttons to set the numerator of the time signature. Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] Click (standard metronome sound) Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish Click and bell TIP To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.” Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings. Procedure 1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Setting” menu. [VOICE SETTING] Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the voice. Detailed Settings 2. The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice. [Main] [Main × Layer] [Left] [Left × Layer] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode) MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode) LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode) LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode) CLP-175 79 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] TIP In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. TIP Parameter names enclosed in parentheses ( ) are displayed in Dual mode. Setting the octave [Octave]* Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* You can specify the position in the stereo image from which you hear the sound. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO The pitch of a note can be shifted upward or downward in steps of an octave. See the procedure on page 73. A C YES D In Dual mode: B A NO B YES NO Detailed Settings C D C D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) In Dual mode: A Setting range: B NO C YES L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right) D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: –2 (two octaves lower) - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two octaves higher) Make fine adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] The pitch of the two sounds selected in Dual mode can be “skewed” slightly away from each other. See the procedure on page 73. Setting the volume level [Volume]* A You can set the volume level for each voice part. See the procedure on page 73. C YES D A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2) Setting range: Setting range: –20–+20 (Positive (+) settings will raise the pitch of the first sound and lower the pitch of the second sound. Negative (–) settings will do the opposite.) D In Dual mode: CLP-175 YES B NO 80 B NO C A 0 - 127 YES Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type] TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” See the procedure on page 73. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C A B YES NO D C YES D Setting range: Setting range: Room Simulates reverberation in a room. Hall1 Simulates reverberation in a concert hall. Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of “Hall1.” Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound. Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal plate. Chorus Celeste Flanger Detailed Settings Adds a rich, spacious sound. Adds swell and a spacious sound. Adds swell effects of an ascending or descending jet plane. Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]* See the procedure on page 73. Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* A B NO TIP The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is set to “0.” C YES D In Dual mode: A See the procedure on page 73. B NO A YES B NO YES C D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) C D Setting range: In Dual mode: 0 - 127 A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 - 127 CLP-175 81 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] AutoPan Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff] You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/ off setting for the voice automatically changes according to this parameter. TIP Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0. Setting the speed of the vibraphone vibrato effect* [VibeRotorSpeed(RotorSpeed)] See the procedure on page 73. A B Detailed Settings NO C The sound pans left to right and back and forth. Phaser The phase changes periodically, swelling the sound. AutoWah The center frequency of the wah filter changes periodically. SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a piano soundboard. Off No effect. YES TERMINOLOGY Rotor= The rotating portion of an electrical device etc. D This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. This sets the speed of the vibrato effect that is applied when you have selected Vibraphone and are using the VibeRotor pedal. See the procedure on page 73. Setting range: On/Off Selecting the DSP type* [DSP Type (DSP)] You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus). See the procedure on page 73. A B Setting range: NO C YES D Setting range: DelayLCR DelayLR Echo CrossDelay Symphonic RotarySpeaker Tremolo VibeRotor 82 CLP-175 Delay applied at left, center, and right positions. Delay applied at left and right positions. Echo-like delay Left and right delays are crossed. Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect. Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. The volume level changes in rapid cycles. The vibrato effect of a vibraphone. 1–10 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Turning the vibraphone vibrato effect on/off* [VibeRotorOnOff (RotorOnOff)] Adjusting the brightness of the sound* [Brightness] See the procedure on page 73. This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. It turns on/off the vibrato effect that is applied when you use the VibeRotor pedal. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C Setting range: YES D Setting range: On/Off This will be displayed only if RotarySpeaker is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained above. It sets the rotation speed of the rotary speaker effect. See the procedure on page 73. Adjusting the resonance effect* [HarmonicContent (Harmonic)] Detailed Settings Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speaker* [RotarySpeed (Rot.Speed)] –64–+63 See the procedure on page 73. Setting range: –64–+63 TIP Resonance can produce a distinctive “peaky” tone, making the sound brighter and harder. Setting range: Slow/Fast Adjusting the depth of the DSP effect* [DSPDepth] This sets the depth of the DSP effect (page 82). Some DSP Type settings do not allow you to set the DSPDepth. See the procedure on page 73. Setting range: 1 (output only the original sound with almost no effect applied)–127 (output only the sound processed by the effect) CLP-175 83 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Adjusting the low-range frequency of the equalizer* [EQ LowFreq. (EQ L.Freq)] Adjusting the high-range frequency of the equalizer* [EQ HighFreq. (EQ H.Freq)] TERMINOLOGY Equalizer: An audio equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into multiple regions and enables the user to adjust the relative amplitude of each region. See the procedure on page 73. Setting range: High Gain Low Gain 500 Hz–16.0 kHz Detailed Settings Adjusting the high-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* [EQ HighGain] See the procedure on page 73. Low Freq. High Freq. A See the procedure on page 73. NO C Setting range: –12–+12 dB Setting range: 32 Hz–2.0 kHz Adjusting the low-range gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer* [EQ LowGain] See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C Setting range: –12–+12 dB 84 CLP-175 B YES D YES D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]* Setting the right pedal function [RPedal] This parameter enables determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe organs do not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.) See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C YES D A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127 (loudest and fixed) A B NO C YES D Setting range: Sustain SustainCont ON/OFF switch type damper Damper that sustains the sound proportionately to how deeply you press the pedal Sostenuto Sostenuto (page 31) Soft Soft (page 31) Expression A function that lets you create changes in dynamics (volume) as you play PitchBend Up A function that smoothly raises the pitch PitchBend Down A function that smoothly lowers the pitch RotarySpeed Change the rotational speed of the JazzOrgan rotary speaker (switch between fast/slow each time you press the pedal) Viberotor Switch the vibraphone vibrato on/off (switch on/off each time you press the pedal) Off No function Detailed Settings In Dual mode: See the procedure on page 73. Normal setting: SustainCont Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C YES D Setting range: Same as “Specifying the function of the right pedal,” above. Normal Setting: Sostenuto CLP-175 85 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C YES D Setting range: Same as “Right pedal function assignment” (page 85). Normal Setting: Detailed Settings Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and VibraPhone) Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor) Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C YES D Setting range: Same as “Right pedal function assignment” (page 85). Normal setting: Expression TIP Optional pedals YAMAHA FC7 foot controller This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, SustainCont, or PitchBend Up/Down. YAMAHA FC4 foot switch YAMAHA FC5 foot switch These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, or VibeRotor. 86 CLP-175 Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] This section describes how to adjust various iAFC settings, such as selecting the iAFC type and adjusting the depth. You can also perform an automatic adjustment in order to obtain the optimal iAFC effect. Procedure Press [iAFC SETTING] to enter iAFC Setting mode. [iAFC SETTING] Selecting the iAFC type [iAFC Type] See the procedure on page 73. A B NO YES NaturalSndBrd (Natural Soundboard) This creates the resonance and enhances the acoustic realism of the sound that is characteristic of acoustic instruments. When used on a grand piano sound, it produces a more naturalsounding piano. The sound of the instrument itself is picked up by mics, and processed to create a virtual soundboard. Detailed Settings • To turn on the iAFC, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the iAFC will not be turned on. • Perform the automatic adjustment when you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and also after you have moved the Clavinova. (page 88) DynDmpEfx (Dynamic Damper Effect) This simulates the sustain sound that occur when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano. The mic is not used, but the sound produced within the Clavinova is processed to create a spacious sensation. This parameter is effective only on the voice group “GRANDPIANO1.” Setting range: C Select the iAFC type D DynDmpEfx Select the iAFC variation TIP To understand the character of each iAFC type ... Listen to the demo song for each iAFC type. (page 34) NaturalSndBrd/SpatialEnsEfx Settings: DynDmpEfx NaturalSndBrd/SpatialEnsEfx SpatialEnsEfx (Spatial Ensemble Effect) This lets you experience the ambience and reverberation that are characteristic of performing on stage. Ambience and reverberation are also added to the performance of the musicians playing together with you, letting you enjoy the sensation of playing together on stage. The sound of the instrument itself and the sound of singing and other instruments played nearby is picked up by mics, and processed to simulate the spatial characteristic of performing together on stage. GrandPiano, SemiConcert, FullConcert Small, Medium, Large Normal setting: SemiConcert Medium Adjusting the iAFC depth [iAFC Depth] See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 0–127 Normal setting: 106 CLP-175 87 Detailed settings for iAFC [iAFC SETTING] Calibration (automatic adjustment) [Calibration] Detailed Settings To perform the automatic adjustment, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay, the automatic adjustment will not be performed. This automatically adjusts the sensitivity and response of iAFC so that the optimal iAFC effect will be obtained. When automatic adjustment begins, a fairly loud harpsichord note will sound four times at a fixed interval. Automatic adjustment will end in approximately two and a half minutes. While automatic adjustment is being performed, do not make audible noises in the vicinity of the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 73. TIP iAFC cannot be used in the following cases: • When the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. • When the Speaker setting is Normal, and headphones are connected. • When the Speaker setting is Off. TIP If you close the lid completely or to the shorter stay while performing the automatic adjustment, the adjustment will be aborted. If this occurs, perform the automatic adjustment once again. TIP The keyboard will not produce sound while automatic adjustment is being performed. Nor is it possible to adjust the volume of the Clavinova. TIP If a sound occurs in the vicinity of the Clavinova during automatic adjustment, the automatic adjustment may be aborted, and the settings reset to their default values. If this occurs, we recommend that you perform the automatic adjustment once again. 88 CLP-175 TIP If any low-range noise (such as an air conditioner or traffic) is audible around the Clavinova during the automatic adjustment, the adjustment may abort and the settings reset to their default values. If this occurs, we recommend that you perform the automatic adjustment once again after you eliminate the noise. TIP If you re-locate the Clavinova after making the automatic adjustment, first reset the iAFC settings to their default values before re-locating the unit. (See the following.) Restoring the default iAFC settings [iAFC Default] This sets the iAFC function to the default setting. See the procedure on page 73. MIDI [MIDI SETTING] You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. MIDI connectors PC-2 MIDI IN OUT Mac USB THRU MIDI HOST SELECT TIP Prepare dedicated MIDI cables. [TO HOST] jack Use this jack to connect the Clavinova to a computer. PC-2 MIDI When you are using the MIDI connectors, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to “MIDI.” (See page 61.) Mac USB HOST SELECT TO HOST TIP The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 63 for more information. [USB] jack Use this jack to connect the Clavinova and computer. PC-2 MIDI Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI Implementation Chart is listed on page 32 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-175. Detailed Settings MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is. TIP MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. Mac USB HOST SELECT TO HOST USB TIP When you are using the [TO HOST] jack, set the [HOST SELECT] switch correctly, according to the type of computer you are using. (See page 61.) NOTE When you are using the [USB] jack, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to “USB.” TIP You can also obtain detailed information about MIDI from various music magazines and books. CLP-175 89 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Procedure Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode. [MIDI SETTING] Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] Setting the MIDI receive channel [MidiInChannel] This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. See the procedure on page 73. Detailed Settings A You can specify whether each channel of data from MIDI [IN], [TO HOST], and [USB] will be received. See the procedure on page 73. B A NO B YES NO C D C Select a voice part. Specify the channel. Setting for: Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.) Normal setting: Main — Ch1 Left — Ch2 Layer — Ch3 Left Layer— Ch4 YES D Select a channel. Select a MIDI receive part. Setting for: Ch1 - Ch32 Setting range: Song, Main, Left, Layer, LeftLayer, Keyboard, Off Normal setting: Ch1–16 Ch17 Ch18 Ch19 Ch20 Ch21 Others — — — — — — — Song Keyboard Main Left Layer LeftLayer Off MIDI data MIDI IN TO HOST USB (When the channel setting is other than Song or Off) Port A 90 CLP-175 Port B Sound source A Channels 1-16 Sound source B Channels 17-32 Used for song playback Only for song playback Played from the keyboard MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl] “Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova produces the sound from its tone generator when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off ” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off ” setting is useful when you wish to play an external sound source while playing the keys on the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 73. This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can receive. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C Select a type of data. YES D Select On or Off. Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System Exclusive) Detailed Settings A Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter] B Setting range: NO C YES On/Off Normal setting: D On for all types of data Setting range: Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] On/Off Normal setting: On Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect] This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can transmit. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO You can select whether your performance data or song playback data (including demo songs) is sent via MIDI. See the procedure on page 73. C Select a type of data. YES D Select On or Off. Type of data: A B NO C YES D Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: On/Off Setting range: Normal setting: Keyboard performance data played on the keyboard Song song playback data On for all types of data Normal setting: Keyboard CLP-175 91 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you record performance data to a connected sequencer, it is useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of the performance data) the panel setup data for your performance during playback. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO Detailed Settings C YES D Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump] You can transmit the voice data specified in the “Voice Setting” menu (page 79) as MIDI bulk data. You can interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C 92 CLP-175 YES D Other settings You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc. Procedure Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode. [OTHER SETTING] Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] Fine tuning the pitch [Tune] A B A NO B YES NO C Detailed Settings You can specify a touch response (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). See the procedure on page 73. You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. See the procedure on page 73. YES D C Setting range: Light With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a loud sound. The volume level of tones tends to be consistent. Medium Standard touch response. Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a loud volume. This allows for versatile expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones. Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how hard you play the keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the volume level. D Setting range: A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps) Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices. See the procedure on page 73. A B Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level: NO YES 1 - 127 C D Setting range: Stretch Flat Tuning curve particularly for pianos Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range CLP-175 93 Other settings Selecting a scale [Scale] A You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience the tunings of these genres. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C D Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently most popular piano tuning scale. PureMajor/PureMinor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. They are sometimes used for chorus parts. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is based on the interval of a perfect 5th. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MeanTone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th century through the late 18th century. Handel used this scale. WerckMeister/KirnBerger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often used now to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. Detailed Settings NO C Normal setting: Equal If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons. D C, C , D, E , E, F, F , G, A , A, B , B Setting range: Specifying the Split Point [SplitPoint] You can specify the split point (the boundary between the right-hand and left-hand keyboard areas). See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C YES D Setting range: A-1–C7 NOTE You can also use [SPLIT] to set the split point. (page 38) Changing the key [Transpose] TIP TRANSPOSE= To change the key (Changing the key: To raise or lower the overall pitch of the entire song.) The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F. Setting for: Master Keyboard Song CLP-175 YES YES Setting range: 94 B The sound of the entire instrument (the manually-played sound and the song playback) The manually-played sound The song playback Other settings Setting range: –12 (–1 octave)–0 (normal pitch)–+12 (+1 octave) Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal [SoftPedalDepth] Specify the volume of the keyoff sound [KeyOffSamplingDepth] You can adjust the volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key) This is effective on the voice groups “Grand Piano1,” “Harpsichord,” and “E.Clavichord” and on the voice “E.Piano2.” See the procedure on page 73. See the procedure on page 73. Setting range: 1–10 Off, 1 - 10 This parameter is effective on the voices, such as “Grand Piano 1.” See the procedure on page 73. A Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] B NO C YES D Setting range: Off, 1 - 10 This parameter enables you to select whether the sound is sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”). See the procedure on page 73. A Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth] This parameter is effective only on the voice group “GRANDPIANO1.” See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C YES D Setting range: PianoLike, Normal Normal setting: PianoLike B NO C Detailed Settings Setting range: Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] YES D Setting range: Off, 1 - 10 CLP-175 95 Other settings Assign the SONG [START/ STOP] function to the pedal [PedalStart/Stop] Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] TIP If you assign the SONG START/STOP function to a pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in the Voice Setting menu (pages 85 and 86) is disabled. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO YES C Detailed Settings Select a pedal to assign the function. Here you can specify the point to which you must depress the pedal (right, center, left, AUX) before the assigned effect begins to be applied. (This setting applies to effects that can be assigned to each pedal, such as damper or sostenuto (page 85). Expression is not affected by this setting.) If the effect is an on/off type effect, this setting specifies the point at which the effect will be switched on/off. A D Set to On or Off. B NO Setting for: C YES D Left, Middle, AUX Setting range: Setting range: –2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effective with the deepest press) On/Off Normal setting: Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange] Off for all pedals Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType] A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector may switch on and off differently. For example, some pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off when you press them. Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism. See the procedure on page 73. A This specifies the amount of change that can be produced by the pitch bend function which smoothly varies the pitch. • This setting applies only to the manually-played sound. • This setting can be made in semitone steps. • You can set the pedal function (page 85) to specify whether the pitch will be raised or lowered. See the procedure on page 73. B A NO B YES NO C YES D C D Setting range: Make, Break Setting range: 0–+12 (Pressing the pedal will raise/lower the pitch by 12 semitones [1 octave]) Normal setting: 2 96 CLP-175 Other settings Switch the speaker on/off [Speaker] Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] This setting lets you switch the speaker on/off. See the procedure on page 73. Normal (HeadphoneSW) The speaker will sound only if headphones are not connected. On The speaker will always sound. Off The speaker will not sound. You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings. • The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File menu does not change. • The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/ Off) (left column) is reset to the normal setting. • You can specify whether the memory songs are erased or kept. See the procedure on page 73. Reset the Clavinova. A B NO You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavinova. • Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting (page 56) are always backed up. See the procedure on page 73. A B NO C Select the desired item. YES D Select on or off. Setting for: Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, iAfcOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, iAfcSetting, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting (except for Transpose and SplitPoint setting). C Detailed Settings Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] YES D Select a value for memory songs. Selecting for “MemorySong”: MemorySongExcluded MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are kept. Memory songs are erased. Other method for restoring the normal settings Press and hold down the white key on the right end (C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs saved in the storage memory are not erased. If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and black key (B6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. B 6 D 2 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 HARPSICHORD N STRINGS CHOIR SYNTH. PAD E.CLAVICHORD VIBRAPHONE GUITAR WOOD BASS E.BASS XG VOICE VOICE SETTING ON/OFF MIDI SETTING AFC SETTING OTHER SETTING AFC SPLIT VARIATION REVERB CHORUS BRILLIANCE MELLOW BRIGHT EFFECT POWER Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, and OtherSetting (except for Transpose and SplitPoint setting) parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to On. C7 [POWER] CLP-175 97 Message List The messages are listed in alphabetical order. Message Meaning This will be displayed following the “BulkDataReceiving Voice” message. This indicates that the Clavinova finished receiving the bulk data. Once you have verified this message, you may proceed to the next step. Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again. The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. Detailed Settings This message will appear if a sound is audible in the vicinity of the Clavinova during automatic adjustment. The automatic adjustment may abort, and the settings reset to their default values. In this case, perform the automatic adjustment once again. This message means that when the “Speaker” setting is set to Normal and headphones are connected, no sound is output from the speaker on the bottom face, and therefore automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible. In this case, unplug the headphones. This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible because the lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. In this case, open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. This message means that automatic adjustment of iAFC is not possible because no sound is output from the speaker on the bottom face. In this case if the “Speaker” setting is Off, turn “Speaker” On. If “Speaker” is set to Normal and headphones are connected, unplug the headphones. This message confirms that in the “VoiceBulkDump” operation (page 92), you pressed the B [–(NO)] button to cancel while data was being transmitted. This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step. When you delete a folder, this message asks you whether you want to delete all of the files in that folder. To delete all files in the folder, press the D [+(YES)] button. To cancel, press the D [–(NO)] button. Writing or reading data from the disk has failed. Try again. If you still see this message, the disk may be damaged or the disk drive may have malfunction. If you see this message while using a brand new disk, it is more likely that the disk drive is malfunctioning. Ask your Yamaha dealer for repair. 98 CLP-175 Message List Message Meaning The floppy disk space is full and can no longer record data. Use a new disk (page 50) or delete unnecessary files from the disk (page 51) to make room for new data. You attempted to eject a floppy disk from the disk drive while the drive was writing or reading. The writing or reading operation is not complete yet. Try it again. When you attempted to rename a song and save it in “RenameSong” (page 53), this message will appear if an identically-named song already exists in the save memory / floppy disk that contains that song. Three seconds after this message is displayed, you will return to the previous screen. Please specify a different name. Detailed Settings This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel. The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 97) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 97). The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 97) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and B6 keys and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 97). The Clavinova’s flash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous screen. There is a problem with the TO HOST/USB connector When using the CLP-175 connected to your personal computer ... The driver or MIDI application on your computer is not functioning correctly, perhaps because the computer is turned off, the cable is not connected correctly, or the HOST SELECT switch is not set correctly. In this case, turn off the power of the CLP-175 and your computer, and check the cable connections and HOST SELECT switch setting. Then turn on the power in the order of your computer → CLP-175, and check that the driver and MIDI application on your computer are functioning correctly. When using the CLP-175 by itself ... This message may appear if a cable is left connected to the [TO HOST] or [USB] jack of the CLP-175. In this case, turn off the power of the CLP-175, disconnect the cable, and then turn on the power again. If the cable is left connected, the CLP-175 may not function correctly. CLP-175 99 Message List Message Meaning In the CopyDisk operation (page 54), the copy source disk has not been inserted to the disk drive. Insert the disk. In the CopyDisk operation (page 54), the copy destination disk has not been inserted into the disk drive. Insert the disk. You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power. The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered. Detailed Settings This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the storage memory as much as possible. This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted. While a preset song was being read, the Clavinova detected defects in memory. Reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings with “MemorySongIncluded” (page 97) after you back up all song data. This message indicates that there may be a problem with the memory. If the message appears repeatedly when you continue using the Clavinova, back up the song data, then restore the default setting by using “FactorySet” with “MemorySongIncluded” selected (page 97). There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs. Save songs to a floppy disk (page 54) or delete some songs in the storage memory, then save new data to memory. A floppy disk has not been inserted into the disk drive for a diskrelated operation. Insert the disk and continue. This message will appear if there is no song for the “SaveToMemory” (page 50) or “SaveToDisk” (page 51) operation to save. In this case, no song will be saved. You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory or on disk. You cannot delete the song. 100 CLP-175 Message List Message Meaning This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears. You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected files (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such files. Detailed Settings 1. You tried to write, copy, or delete data on a disk that has its “write protect” tab on, or a disk that is internally protected against writing. Set the protect tab to off (unprotected) (page 13) and try again. If you still see this message, the disk is internally protected (such as commercially available music data). You cannot write or copy to such a disk. 2. This message also appears when you try to copy data on an internally-protected disk onto another disk using the CopyDisk function (page 54). You cannot duplicate such a disk. After you load an internally-protected song into the Clavinova’s Current memory or storage memory, you tried to save the song to a floppy disk. You cannot save such a song to another disk. You cannot write or copy to such a disk. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel. You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to storage memory or a floppy disk. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “SaveToMemory” (page 50) or “SaveToDisk” (page 51) parameter screen. If necessary, select “SaveToMemory” or “SaveToDisk” accordingly and save the recorded song, then proceed to another operation. CLP-175 101 Message List Message Meaning 1. This message will appear if a problem is found with the song data when you select a song or while the song is playing. In this case, reselect the song, and try once again to play it back. If the message still appears, the song data may have been damaged. 2. This message will appear if a different “CharacterCode” (page 56) is selected than when you assigned the song name. In this case, switch the “CharacterCode”, re-select the song, and play back. Detailed Settings 1. This message will be displayed if current memory fills up during recording. Recording will stop automatically at this point. The data that had been recorded up to that point will remain. This message will also be displayed when you attempt to enter Record mode for additional recording if that song already occupies all of current memory. In this case, additional recording will not be possible. If there is an already-recorded track that you do not need to keep, you can use “ChannelClear” (page 76) to delete the unneeded track, so that you will then be able to record the equivalent amount of additional material. 2. This message will be displayed when you select a song if that song is larger than the capacity of the current memory (page 104). This song cannot be loaded into the CLP-175, and cannot be played back. Please select a different song. This message will be displayed when you edit a song if that song is larger than the capacity of the current memory (page 104). This song cannot be edited on the CLP-175. This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation. This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. You tried to perform a file- or disk-related operation using an unformatted disk. Eject the disk, format it using the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 55), and try again. You tried to perform a file- or disk-related operation using an unformatted disk. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. To format the disk and try again, press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the “FormatDisk” parameter (page 55). 102 CLP-175 Message List Message Meaning This message means that the Clavinova was unable to transmit voice bulk data. If this message appears, make sure that the power of your computer is not turned off, that the cable is connected correctly, that the HOST SELECT switch is set correctly, and that the driver on your computer is functioning correctly. Then try transmitting the data once again. You tried to copy data to a different type of disk (e.x.: 2DD →2HD, 2HD→2DD) during the CopyDisk operation (page 54). Eject the disk and insert an appropriate disk. CLP-175 Detailed Settings You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by the CLP-175, and the CLP-175 could not process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly. 103 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ The buttons do not respond. While you are using a function, some buttons not used for the function are disabled. If the song is playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then, perform the desired operation. ■ The sound sustains and does not decay when I press the sostenuto pedal. With the voices in the CHURCH ORGAN, JAZZ ORGAN, STRINGS, CHOIR group, or some voices in the XG group, the sound continues sustaining while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal. ■ Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly when the transpose or octave setting is made. Detailed Settings The setting range for the transposition and octave setting is C-2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A-1 - C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower than C-2, it will produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower. ■ How can I return to the recording or song select screen during song recording or playback? Press one of the SONG SELECT [ [ ] buttons once. ] and ■ The tempo does not change even though I recorded with tempo changes. Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case, the recording will be played back at the original tempo. Make tempo changes when the recording track is selected and a red track indicator is flashing. The same trick applies to editing the tempo after recording. ■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not recorded. Track data is lost unexpectedly. For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 35). Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with the second voice (or the notes lower than the Split point) are not recorded. ■ What type of data is recorded? Data recorded in the tracks: • Note data (notes you play) • Voice selection • Clavinova pedals and external pedal on/off • Reverb depth [ReverbSend] • Chorus depth [ChorusSend] • DSP effect depth [DSPDepth] • Sound brightness [Brightness] • Resonance effect setting [Harmonic Content] • Equalizer’s low-range frequency setting [EQLowFreq.] • Equalizer’s low-range gain setting [EQLowGain] • Equalizer’s high-range frequency setting [EQHighFreq.] • Equalizer’s high-range gain setting [EQHighGain] • Octave setting of the voice [Octave] • Volume setting of each voice [Volume] • Left/right position of each sound [Pan] • Fine pitch adjustment between two voices (Dual only) [Detune] • Volume change in response to playing strength for each voice [TouchSense] Data recorded globally in all tracks: • Tempo • Time signature • Reverb type • Chorus type • DSP effect type You can change all data except for note data after recording. You can change the time signature at the beginning of the song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped. 104 CLP-175 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ I cannot change the key signature in the song after recording. Press the [TOP] button to locate the top of the song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the measure in which you wish to change the key signature, then change it. ■ How much data can I record? • Current memory (page 50): About 800KB • Storage memory (page 50): About 750KB • 2DD floppy disk (page 12): about 720KB • 2HD floppy disk (page 12): about 1.4MB ■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed. ■ What is the difference between “TouchSense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data? “TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard. The MIDI note-on velocity data is not changed. It changes the volume level at the same velocity data. “TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity of an instrument. The MIDI note-on velocity data is changed when you play the keyboard with a consistent touch. CLP-175 Detailed Settings Some types of pedals may turn on and off in opposite fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter (page 86) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to change the external pedal setting. ■ The song title is not correct. The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than that used when you named the song. Also, if the song was recorded on another instrument, the title might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode” parameter (page 56) in the FILE menu to change the setting. However, if the song was recorded on another instrument, changing the “CharacterCode” parameter setting may not resolve the problem. 105 Detailed Settings MEMO 106 CLP-175 . Appendix CLP-175 107 Troubleshooting Problem Cause The power of the Clavinova does not turn on. The power cable is not plugged in (check at the Clavinova and at the electrical outlet). Insert the power cable plug firmly into the Clavinova and into the electrical outlet of the correct voltage. (page 18) There is a clicking noise when you press [POWER] to turn the power on or off. This is caused by the electrical power within the instrument. This is not a malfunction. Noise is heard from the Clavinova. A portable telephone is being used near the Clavinova (or the ring tone is sounding). The overall volume is too low. Or, there is no sound at all. The [MASTER VOLUME] is lowered. Headphones are connected (only if the Speaker setting is “Normal HeadphoneSW”). (page 97) Speaker setting is off. Appendix Local Control is turned off. “Expression” is assigned to one of the right, center, and left pedals. Turn off the power of the portable telephone located near the Clavinova. Noise may be heard if a portable telephone is used near the Clavinova or if the ring tone occurs. Raise [MASTER VOLUME]. (page 19) Disconnect the headphone plug. Set [Speaker] to “Normal” or “ON”. (page 97) Set Local control ON. (page 91) Assign any function other than “Expression” to the pedal. Move [SONG BALANCE] toward the keyboard to increase the keyboard volume. The keyboard volume is lower than the song playback volume. The volume level for the keyboard performance is set too low. Sound is still heard from the speakers even though headphones are plugged in. Speaker setting is On. Set the speaker setting to “Normal (HeadphoneSW)”. (page 97) The lid is closed or open with the shorter stay. iAFC was not automatically adjusted correctly. Open the lid with the longer stay using the inner recess. Turn iAFC OFF, and perform the automatic adjustment. (page 88) The plug of the pedal cable is not inserted into the [PEDAL] jack. Plug the pedal cable firmly into the [PEDAL] jack. (page 115) iAFC cannot be turned ON. Feedback occurs when you turn iAFC on. Damper pedal does not function, or notes are sustained even though the damper pedal is not pressed. 108 Solution CLP-175 Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by CLP-175, and whether or not the CLP-175 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Basic Check Points Sequence Format The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below. • Disk Format • Sequence format • Voice allocation format The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” • Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. [Common Sequence Formats] Disk format ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. • Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The CLP-175 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. • Performance data recorded on the CLP-175 is saved in the SMF format 0 in a floppy disk. Appendix Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of saving data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used. This operation is called “formatting.” • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. • CLP-175 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks. • When formatted by the CLP-175, a 2DD disk saves up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk saves up to 1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44 MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.) • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. ■ ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. • The CLP-175 is compatible with ESEQ. CLP-175 109 Data Compatibility Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” • Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. [Main Voice Allocation Formats] Appendix ■ GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software. • The CLP-175 is compatible with GM System Level 1. ■ XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. • The CLP-175 is compatible with XG. • Performance data recorded with preset voices on the CLP-175 can be played on other XG-compatible instruments. ■ DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is also common format used with various Yamaha software. The CLP-175 is compatible with DOC. • Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. 110 CLP-175 Preset Voice List : YES, ×: No Voice group Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance GrandPiano1 This sound was sampled from a full concert grand piano. Three stages of dynamics were sampled, and no effort has been spared in making the sound virtually identical to that of an acoustic piano. Even the tonal changes produced by the damper pedal and the subtle sounds of releasing a key are reproduced. The sympathetic vibration (string resonance) that occurs between the strings of an acoustic piano has also been simulated. Suitable not only for classical compositions but also for piano pieces of any style. MellowPiano A warm and mellow piano sound. Ideal for classical music. RockPiano A bright-sounding piano. Ideal for rock styles. GRAND PIANO1 HonkyTonk Piano GRAND PIANO2 × A honky-tonk style piano. Enjoy a tonal character that is quite different than a grand piano. × × × A spacious and clear piano sound with a bright resonance. Ideal for popular music. BrightPiano × × × A spacious and bright piano sound. Ideal for popular and rock music. × × An electronic piano sound produced by an FM synthesizer. The tone will change as you vary your playing touch. Ideal for popular music. × × This voice simulates the electric piano sound produced by synthesizers in popular music. It also goes well with the acoustic piano sound. × The sound of an electric piano using hammerstruck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. × A different type of electric piano sound. Widely used in rock and popular music. E.Piano1 × SynthPiano × E.Piano2 × Vintage E.Piano × × E.PIANO2 E.CLAVI CHORD × Harpsichord 8' × × × The sound of the instrument frequently used in baroque music. Variations in playing touch will not affect the volume, and a characteristic sound will be heard when you release the key. Harpsichord 8'+4' × × × A harpsichord with an added upper octave. Produces a more brilliant sound. E.Clavichord × × × This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This funky sound is popular in black contemporary music. Because of its unique structure, the instrument produces a peculiar sound when you release the keys. Wah Clavi. × × × A distinctive effect is preset. × × Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. × × A marimba sound, sampled in stereo for spaciousness and realism. × The sound of a celesta (a percussion instrument in which hammers strike metallic bars to produce sound). This instrument is well-known for its appearance in “Dance of the Sugar-plum Fairies” from Tchaikovsky’s “Nutcracker Suite.” Vibraphone Marimba VIBRAPHONE Celesta × × CLP-175 Appendix GrandPiano2 E.PIANO1 HARPSI CHORD Voice description 111 Preset Voice List Voice group Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling String resonance Voice description × × A warm and natural nylon-string guitar sound. Enjoy playing quiet tunes with this realistic stereo-sampled sound. Playing the keyboard strongly will sound a harmonic, producing an even more guitar-like impression. × × × A bright steel guitar sound. Ideal for popular music. NylonGuitar Key-off samples GUITAR SteelGuitar CHURCH ORGAN JAZZORGAN × PipeOrgan Principal × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument) organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music. PipeOrgan Tutti × × × × This voice features a full coupler of a pipe organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta and Fugue by Bach. PipeOrgan Flute1 × × × × A pipe organ sound that combines flute-type (woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8' + 4'). This is a gentle sound that is ideal for accompanying hymns. PipeOrgan Flute2 × × × × A pipe organ sound that combines flute-type (woodwind type) stops of different pitches (8' + 4' + 1-1/3'). This is brighter than PipeOrganFlute1, and is suitable for solos. JazzOrgan × × × × × The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. RotaryOrgan × × × × × A bright electric organ sound. MellowOrgan × × × × × A mellow electric organ sound. Ideal for calmer songs. × × × Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the Dual mode. × × × A bright and spacious strings sound. Suitable for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. × × × The sound of a string ensemble, with a slow attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO. Appendix Strings STRINGS SynthStrings × SlowStrings CHOIR Choir × × × × A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. SlowChoir × × × × The sound of a choir with a slow attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO. Scat × × × You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice. Depending on how hard and what note range you play, different sounds will be produced. SynthPad1 × × × × A warm, mellow, and spacious synth sound. Ideal for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. SynthPad2 × × × × A clear and spacious synth sound. Ideal for sustained parts in the background of an ensemble. WoodBass × × × × The sound of a finger-plucked upright bass. Frequently used in jazz and Latin music. Bass&Cymbal × × × × The sound of a cymbal has been layered onto the bass. Effective when used for jazz walking-bass lines. ElectricBass × × × × The sound of an electric bass. Frequently used in jazz, rock, and popular music. FretlessBass × × × × The sound of a fretless bass. Suitable for styles such as jazz and fusion. SYNTH.PAD WOOD BASS E.BASS 112 CLP-175 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) Dual MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1 GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2 GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + E.Clavichord MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs MAIN + MAIN This combination is often used in popular music. This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound. This combination sounds as if you are playing two notes that are one octave apart. It is suitable for the accompaniment of Salsa music. This is suitable for romantic ballads. This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul music. This combination is very suitable for Baroque music. This combination adds strings and bell sound. A delay effect is automatically applied. Split GrandPiano1 / WoodBass or Bass&Cymbal MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat This is recommended for light Jazz music. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute song. Play these voices elegantly along with piano arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords would be more effective. This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding a variety of expressions. Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create an interesting sound. Appendix MAIN / LEFT Dual + Split MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 + SynthString / GrandPiano1 MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 / ElectricBass MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings / Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination creates the thick sound of a layered piano and strings. This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb and chorus (page 81) will improve the groove. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This combination makes a very brilliant sound. CLP-175 113 Keyboard Stand Assembly How to position the main unit CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can damage the stand. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing the assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Appendix Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. TIP The CLP-175 features an iAFC (Instrumental Active Field Control) effect. This produces sound from the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova, enhancing the reverberation and spaciousness of the sound when you open the lid with the longer stay (page 17). In order to optimize the iAFC effect, please observe the following: • Perform the automatic adjustment after you turn on the power of the Clavinova for the first time, and after each time you re-locate the Clavinova. (page 88) • Do not block the speaker located on the bottom face of the Clavinova. 1. Remove all parts from the box. Confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are included. Main unit Lean the unit against the wall as shown at right. Legs 6 × 25 mm fixing screws × 16 AC power cord 114 CLP-175 Cord holder Pedal box CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers. Be sure to position the keyboard side on the bottom. Spread a large soft cloth, such as a blanket, on the floor. Place the unit on the cloth with the key cover closed and the keyboard side on the bottom and lean the unit against the wall so that the unit will not fall or slip. Place a soft cloth against the wall to protect the instrument and the wall from scratches. CAUTION Do not place the main unit with the rear side facing down. CAUTION Do not lay the main unit upside down on the floor. CAUTION Do not position the main unit so that its bottom is in contact with floor. Keyboard Stand Assembly 2. Attach two front legs and a rear leg. Refer to the diagram below to verify the orientation of the legs. Rear leg Front leg Front leg 3 Insert the pedal cord plug into the pedal connector. Insert the plug so the arrow side faces front (toward the keyboard). If the plug will not go in easily, do not force it. Double-check the orientation of the plug, then try again. 4 Attach the cord holder on the unit as shown in the illustration below, then use the cord holder to affix the pedal cord. Install and tighten four screws on each leg, starting with one of the front legs. 3 4 3. Install the pedal box. 1 Remove the twist tie that affixes the pedal cord to the upper portion of the pedal box. 4. Raising the unit to the standing position. CAUTION Twist tie Appendix Use the front legs as support to raise the unit. • Be careful not to pinch your fingers. • When you raise the unit, do not hold the key cover. 2 Align the cord with the groove on the unit, and attach the pedal box using four screws. CLP-175 115 Keyboard Stand Assembly 5. Connect the power cord. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion Left of the rear leg on the bottom of the main unit, when viewed from front 6. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with Appendix the floor surface. After completing the assembly, please check the following. 116 • Are there any parts left over? → Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? → Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? → Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? → Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? → Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CLP-175 Key cover Index You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words. The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column. Numerics 50 greats for the Piano 13 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Practicing a one-hand part 28 A Adding variation to the sound ➔ Effect function 32 Assembly 114 Assigning the START/STOP function to a pedal 96 AUX IN jacks 62 AUX OUT jacks 62 AUX PEDAL jacks 61 Auxiliary pedal function 86 B C Center pedal 31 Center pedal function 85 Character Code 56 Characters 56 CHORUS 33 combining two voices ➔ Dual mode 35 Connection Audio 62 computer 63 MIDI 66 Other Components 61 Serial 64 Speaker 62 USB 67 Connectors MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 61, 66 CONTRAST* 19 D Damper (right) pedal 31 Data Compatibility 109 E Effect function 32 equalizer 84 EXIT 23 EXTRA TRACKS ➔ the third or more tracks 45 F FactorySet 97 Fast forward 27, 58 FILE* 48 Floppy Disk 12 Formatting a floppy disk 55 H Headphone Hanger 19 Headphones 19 HOST SELECT switch 61 I iAFC 34 iAFC iAFC Detailed settings 87 J Jacks AUX IN 62 AUX OUT 62 AUX PEDAL 61 PHONES 19 TO HOST 61, 64 USB 61 L LCD ➔ Screen 23 Contrast 19 Left pedal 31 Left pedal function 86 Lid 17 List Demonstration tunes 24 Detailed Settings 70 Message 98 Preset Voice 111 Appendix BackUp 97 Bench 13 BRILLIANCE 32 Data type 59 Default (Normal) setting* 32 Demonstration tunes 24 Detailed Settings 70 iAFC 87 Metronome 78 MIDI 89 Other settings 93 recording and playback 75 voices 79 Disk Copy 54 Format 55 SongAutoOpen 56 Disk song 48 Display contrast 19 DOWN (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 39 Dual Detailed settings 79 Recording 47 Dual mode ➔ combining two voices 35 M Maintenance 13 MASTER VOLUME* 19 Memory 48 Memory song 48 MemoryBackUp 97 Message List 98 Metronome 39 Detailed settings 78 METRONOME SETTING 78 MIDI 89 Detailed settings 89 MIDI cables 66 MIDI connectors 63, 66 MIDI driver 64 MIDI SETTING 89 Music braces 16 Music Data 57 CLP-175 117 Music rest 16 N New Song 40 Normal setting* 32 O Other settings 93 Appendix P Pedal Function Auxiliary 86 Center 85 Left 86 Right 85 Pedals 31 Personal computer 63 PHONES jacks 19 Playback 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Demo Songs 25 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Playing back repeatedly (song) 77 Playing back repeatedly (specifying the range) 76 playing two voices ➔ Split mode 37 POWER 18 Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs) 28 Preset song memory 48 Preset Voice List 111 R Recording Tape Recorder 62 Recording in Dual 47 Recording in Split 47 Recording Your Performance 40 Re-recording 42 REVERB 33 Rewind 27, 58 Right pedal 31 Right pedal function 85 118 CLP-175 S Scale 94 Screen 23 Select 50 piano preset songs 26 Demo Songs 25 Recorded Songs and Music Data 57 Selecting a touch response 93 SETTING metronome 78 Volume 19 SMF (Standard MIDI File) 109 Soft (left) pedal 31 Song Data Type 59 Delete 52 Detailed settings 75 Playing back repeatedly 77 Rename 53 Store 48 Store (Floppy disk) 51 Store (Storage memory) 50 SONG [START/STOP] 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Recording 41 SONG BALANCE 47 SONG SELECT 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Recorded Songs and Music Data 57 Recording 40 SONG SETTING 75 Sostenuto (center) pedal 31 Sound brilliance 32 expression 32 reverberation 33 spread and spaciousness 33 Soundboard reverb 33 Split Detailed settings 79 Recording 47 Split mode ➔ playing two voices 37 Split point 38 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices 37 START/STOP metronome 39 Storage memory 48 StringResonance 95 SustainSampling 95 Synchro Start 50 preset songs 28 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 T TEMPO 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 39 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 the third or more tracks ➔ EXTRA TRACKS 45 TO HOST jack 61, 64 TOP 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 Recorded Songs and Music Data 58 Recording 41 TouchResponse 93 Track playback on and off 59 TRACK1/TRACK2 50 Piano Preset Songs 28 Recording 40, 44 Troubleshooting 108 Tune 93 Type of characters 56 Type of data (recorded) 104 U UP (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 27 metronome 39 USB jack 61 V Voice group buttons 30, 37 VOICE SETTING 79 Voices* 30 Detailed settings 79 Volume Balance (SONG BLANCE) 47 Setting 19 X XG 110 MEMO CLP-175 119 MEMO 120 CLP-175 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (class B) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, S.A. Division Professionnelle BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0661 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [CL] 28 CLP-175 CLP-175 Owner's Manual Clavinova Web site (English only) http://www.yamahaclavinova.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2003 Yamaha Corporation IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. WA67380 30?APZC?.?-01A0 Printed in Indonesia DIC 435